diff options
| author | Po Lu | 2024-07-24 11:41:58 +0800 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Po Lu | 2024-07-24 11:41:58 +0800 |
| commit | 6d22bd4d3a0a9cb55bbfffb29ed3e3190c63b565 (patch) | |
| tree | 16d76ac65a47a7fef96bee8f3c528cfff234a26a | |
| parent | 19a18e487b8e2f0c1627b9cc98e601327e884eb2 (diff) | |
| parent | c66bda1a19afd7d8391765e2ed207e44107d8a50 (diff) | |
| download | emacs-6d22bd4d3a0a9cb55bbfffb29ed3e3190c63b565.tar.gz emacs-6d22bd4d3a0a9cb55bbfffb29ed3e3190c63b565.zip | |
Merge from savannah/emacs-30
c66bda1a19a Improve treesit-node-child-by-field-name docstring
85773ab9771 Minor copyedits in tree-sitter starting guide
2dacec1609a Update tag for prebuilt tree-sitter grammars
68615a38669 Fix punctuation and doc style in treesit.c
00adee897ac ; Fix punctuation in docs
ab29b28d4ba Fix DocView with PostScript files
65 files changed, 479 insertions, 482 deletions
diff --git a/admin/notes/tree-sitter/starter-guide b/admin/notes/tree-sitter/starter-guide index b07c80b203c..72102250bbb 100644 --- a/admin/notes/tree-sitter/starter-guide +++ b/admin/notes/tree-sitter/starter-guide | |||
| @@ -34,10 +34,9 @@ merged) and rebuild Emacs. | |||
| 34 | 34 | ||
| 35 | * Install language definitions | 35 | * Install language definitions |
| 36 | 36 | ||
| 37 | Tree-sitter by itself doesn’t know how to parse any particular | 37 | Tree-sitter by itself doesn’t know how to parse any particular language. |
| 38 | language. We need to install language definitions (or “grammars”) for | 38 | We need to install language definitions (or “grammars”) for a language |
| 39 | a language to be able to parse it. There are a couple of ways to get | 39 | to be able to parse it. There are a couple of ways to get them. |
| 40 | them. | ||
| 41 | 40 | ||
| 42 | You can use this script that I put together here: | 41 | You can use this script that I put together here: |
| 43 | 42 | ||
| @@ -48,9 +47,9 @@ C++, Rust, JSON, Go, HTML, JavaScript, CSS, Python, Typescript, | |||
| 48 | C#, etc. Better yet, I pre-built these language definitions for | 47 | C#, etc. Better yet, I pre-built these language definitions for |
| 49 | GNU/Linux and macOS, they can be downloaded here: | 48 | GNU/Linux and macOS, they can be downloaded here: |
| 50 | 49 | ||
| 51 | https://github.com/casouri/tree-sitter-module/releases/tag/v2.1 | 50 | https://github.com/casouri/tree-sitter-module/releases/tag/v2.4 |
| 52 | 51 | ||
| 53 | To build them yourself, run | 52 | To build them yourself, run: |
| 54 | 53 | ||
| 55 | git clone git@github.com:casouri/tree-sitter-module.git | 54 | git clone git@github.com:casouri/tree-sitter-module.git |
| 56 | cd tree-sitter-module | 55 | cd tree-sitter-module |
| @@ -73,26 +72,25 @@ automatically download and compile the language grammar for you. | |||
| 73 | 72 | ||
| 74 | * Setting up for adding major mode features | 73 | * Setting up for adding major mode features |
| 75 | 74 | ||
| 76 | Start Emacs and load tree-sitter with | 75 | Start Emacs and load tree-sitter with: |
| 77 | 76 | ||
| 78 | (require 'treesit) | 77 | (require 'treesit) |
| 79 | 78 | ||
| 80 | Now check if Emacs is built with tree-sitter library | 79 | Now check if Emacs is built with tree-sitter library: |
| 81 | 80 | ||
| 82 | (treesit-available-p) | 81 | (treesit-available-p) |
| 83 | 82 | ||
| 84 | Make sure Emacs can find the language grammar you want to use | 83 | Make sure Emacs can find the language grammar you want to use: |
| 85 | 84 | ||
| 86 | (treesit-language-available-p 'lang) | 85 | (treesit-language-available-p 'lang) |
| 87 | 86 | ||
| 88 | * Tree-sitter major modes | 87 | * Tree-sitter major modes |
| 89 | 88 | ||
| 90 | Tree-sitter modes should be separate major modes, so other modes | 89 | Tree-sitter modes should be separate major modes, so other modes |
| 91 | inheriting from the original mode don't break if tree-sitter is | 90 | inheriting from the original mode don't break if tree-sitter is enabled. |
| 92 | enabled. For example js2-mode inherits js-mode, we can't enable | 91 | For example js2-mode inherits js-mode, we can't enable tree-sitter in |
| 93 | tree-sitter in js-mode, lest js-mode would not setup things that | 92 | js-mode, lest js-mode would not setup things that js2-mode expects to |
| 94 | js2-mode expects to inherit from. So it's best to use separate major | 93 | inherit from. So it's best to use separate major modes. |
| 95 | modes. | ||
| 96 | 94 | ||
| 97 | If the tree-sitter variant and the "native" variant could share some | 95 | If the tree-sitter variant and the "native" variant could share some |
| 98 | setup, you can create a "base mode", which only contains the common | 96 | setup, you can create a "base mode", which only contains the common |
| @@ -119,19 +117,18 @@ you. The query function returns a list of (capture-name . node). For | |||
| 119 | font-lock, we use face names as capture names. And the captured node | 117 | font-lock, we use face names as capture names. And the captured node |
| 120 | will be fontified in their capture name. | 118 | will be fontified in their capture name. |
| 121 | 119 | ||
| 122 | The capture name could also be a function, in which case (NODE | 120 | The capture name could also be a function, in which case (NODE OVERRIDE |
| 123 | OVERRIDE START END) is passed to the function for fontification. START | 121 | START END) is passed to the function for fontification. START and END |
| 124 | and END are the start and end of the region to be fontified. The | 122 | are the start and end of the region to be fontified. The function |
| 125 | function should only fontify within that region. The function should | 123 | should only fontify within that region. The function should also allow |
| 126 | also allow more optional arguments with (&rest _), for future | 124 | more optional arguments with (&rest _), for future extensibility. For |
| 127 | extensibility. For OVERRIDE check out the docstring of | 125 | OVERRIDE check out the docstring of treesit-font-lock-rules. |
| 128 | treesit-font-lock-rules. | ||
| 129 | 126 | ||
| 130 | ** Query syntax | 127 | ** Query syntax |
| 131 | 128 | ||
| 132 | There are two types of nodes, named, like (identifier), | 129 | There are two types of nodes, named, like (identifier), |
| 133 | (function_definition), and anonymous, like "return", "def", "(", | 130 | (function_definition), and anonymous, like "return", "def", "(", |
| 134 | "}". Parent-child relationship is expressed as | 131 | "}". Parent-child relationship is expressed as: |
| 135 | 132 | ||
| 136 | (parent (child) (child) (child (grand_child))) | 133 | (parent (child) (child) (child (grand_child))) |
| 137 | 134 | ||
| @@ -155,8 +152,7 @@ The query above captures both parent and child. | |||
| 155 | 152 | ||
| 156 | ["return" "continue" "break"] @keyword | 153 | ["return" "continue" "break"] @keyword |
| 157 | 154 | ||
| 158 | The query above captures all the keywords with capture name | 155 | The query above captures all the keywords with capture name "keyword". |
| 159 | "keyword". | ||
| 160 | 156 | ||
| 161 | These are the common syntax, see all of them in the manual | 157 | These are the common syntax, see all of them in the manual |
| 162 | ("Parsing Program Source" section). | 158 | ("Parsing Program Source" section). |
| @@ -168,7 +164,7 @@ open any python source file, type M-x treesit-explore-mode RET. Now | |||
| 168 | you should see the parse-tree in a separate window, automatically | 164 | you should see the parse-tree in a separate window, automatically |
| 169 | updated as you select text or edit the buffer. Besides this, you can | 165 | updated as you select text or edit the buffer. Besides this, you can |
| 170 | consult the grammar of the language definition. For example, Python’s | 166 | consult the grammar of the language definition. For example, Python’s |
| 171 | grammar file is at | 167 | grammar file is at: |
| 172 | 168 | ||
| 173 | https://github.com/tree-sitter/tree-sitter-python/blob/master/grammar.js | 169 | https://github.com/tree-sitter/tree-sitter-python/blob/master/grammar.js |
| 174 | 170 | ||
| @@ -262,7 +258,7 @@ Concretely, something like this: | |||
| 262 | 258 | ||
| 263 | * Indent | 259 | * Indent |
| 264 | 260 | ||
| 265 | Indent works like this: We have a bunch of rules that look like | 261 | Indent works like this: We have a bunch of rules that look like: |
| 266 | 262 | ||
| 267 | (MATCHER ANCHOR OFFSET) | 263 | (MATCHER ANCHOR OFFSET) |
| 268 | 264 | ||
| @@ -354,9 +350,8 @@ Set ‘treesit-simple-imenu-settings’ and call | |||
| 354 | 350 | ||
| 355 | * Navigation | 351 | * Navigation |
| 356 | 352 | ||
| 357 | Set ‘treesit-defun-type-regexp’ and call | 353 | Set ‘treesit-defun-type-regexp’ and call ‘treesit-major-mode-setup’. |
| 358 | ‘treesit-major-mode-setup’. You can additionally set | 354 | You can additionally set ‘treesit-defun-name-function’. |
| 359 | ‘treesit-defun-name-function’. | ||
| 360 | 355 | ||
| 361 | * Which-func | 356 | * Which-func |
| 362 | 357 | ||
| @@ -404,13 +399,12 @@ BTW ‘treesit-node-string’ does different things. | |||
| 404 | * Manual | 399 | * Manual |
| 405 | 400 | ||
| 406 | I suggest you read the manual section for tree-sitter in Info. The | 401 | I suggest you read the manual section for tree-sitter in Info. The |
| 407 | section is Parsing Program Source. Typing | 402 | section is Parsing Program Source. Typing: |
| 408 | 403 | ||
| 409 | C-h i d m elisp RET g Parsing Program Source RET | 404 | C-h i d m elisp RET g Parsing Program Source RET |
| 410 | 405 | ||
| 411 | will bring you to that section. You don’t need to read through every | 406 | will bring you to that section. You don’t need to read through every |
| 412 | sentence, just read the text paragraphs and glance over function | 407 | sentence, just read the text paragraphs and glance over function names. |
| 413 | names. | ||
| 414 | 408 | ||
| 415 | * Appendix 1 | 409 | * Appendix 1 |
| 416 | 410 | ||
diff --git a/doc/emacs/custom.texi b/doc/emacs/custom.texi index a385d06bb1d..1527e42bbfe 100644 --- a/doc/emacs/custom.texi +++ b/doc/emacs/custom.texi | |||
| @@ -2044,7 +2044,7 @@ sequences. For example, to bind @kbd{C-c h} to the string | |||
| 2044 | @end example | 2044 | @end example |
| 2045 | 2045 | ||
| 2046 | Non-@acronym{ASCII} characters can be specified directly in the | 2046 | Non-@acronym{ASCII} characters can be specified directly in the |
| 2047 | string. To bind to e.g. @samp{ol@'a}, use: | 2047 | string. To bind to e.g. @samp{ol@'a}, use: |
| 2048 | 2048 | ||
| 2049 | @example | 2049 | @example |
| 2050 | (keymap-global-set "C-c h" (key-description "ol@'a")) | 2050 | (keymap-global-set "C-c h" (key-description "ol@'a")) |
diff --git a/doc/emacs/display.texi b/doc/emacs/display.texi index 8f22e3c88da..88520874c8e 100644 --- a/doc/emacs/display.texi +++ b/doc/emacs/display.texi | |||
| @@ -2198,7 +2198,7 @@ The line numbers are displayed in a special face @code{line-number}. | |||
| 2198 | The current line number is displayed in a different face, | 2198 | The current line number is displayed in a different face, |
| 2199 | @code{line-number-current-line}, so you can make the current line's | 2199 | @code{line-number-current-line}, so you can make the current line's |
| 2200 | number have a distinct appearance, which will help locating the line | 2200 | number have a distinct appearance, which will help locating the line |
| 2201 | showing point. Additional faces @code{line-number-major-tick} and | 2201 | showing point. Additional faces @code{line-number-major-tick} and |
| 2202 | @code{line-number-minor-tick} can be used to highlight the line numbers | 2202 | @code{line-number-minor-tick} can be used to highlight the line numbers |
| 2203 | of lines which are a multiple of certain numbers. Customize | 2203 | of lines which are a multiple of certain numbers. Customize |
| 2204 | @code{display-line-numbers-major-tick} and | 2204 | @code{display-line-numbers-major-tick} and |
diff --git a/doc/emacs/fortran-xtra.texi b/doc/emacs/fortran-xtra.texi index 5225dfccbd0..1884ee76219 100644 --- a/doc/emacs/fortran-xtra.texi +++ b/doc/emacs/fortran-xtra.texi | |||
| @@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ check the outermost block since that may be incomplete. | |||
| 124 | @findex f90-beginning-of-block | 124 | @findex f90-beginning-of-block |
| 125 | @item C-M-p | 125 | @item C-M-p |
| 126 | Move to the start of the current code block | 126 | Move to the start of the current code block |
| 127 | (@code{fortran-beginning-of-block}/@code{f90-beginning-of-block}). This | 127 | (@code{fortran-beginning-of-block}/@code{f90-beginning-of-block}). This |
| 128 | is like @code{fortran-end-of-block}, but moves backwards. | 128 | is like @code{fortran-end-of-block}, but moves backwards. |
| 129 | @end table | 129 | @end table |
| 130 | 130 | ||
diff --git a/doc/emacs/frames.texi b/doc/emacs/frames.texi index e1fbf9768af..b5f2c5f5e84 100644 --- a/doc/emacs/frames.texi +++ b/doc/emacs/frames.texi | |||
| @@ -1543,7 +1543,7 @@ After customizing the variable @code{tab-bar-select-tab-modifiers} to | |||
| 1543 | specify one or more @var{modifier} keys, you can select a tab by its | 1543 | specify one or more @var{modifier} keys, you can select a tab by its |
| 1544 | ordinal number using one of the specified modifiers in combination | 1544 | ordinal number using one of the specified modifiers in combination |
| 1545 | with the tab number to select. The number 9 can be used to select the | 1545 | with the tab number to select. The number 9 can be used to select the |
| 1546 | last tab. You can select any modifiers supported by Emacs, | 1546 | last tab. You can select any modifiers supported by Emacs, |
| 1547 | @pxref{Modifier Keys}. To display the tab number alongside the tab | 1547 | @pxref{Modifier Keys}. To display the tab number alongside the tab |
| 1548 | name, you can customize another variable @code{tab-bar-tab-hints}. | 1548 | name, you can customize another variable @code{tab-bar-tab-hints}. |
| 1549 | This will help you decide which numerical key to press to select the | 1549 | This will help you decide which numerical key to press to select the |
diff --git a/doc/emacs/trouble.texi b/doc/emacs/trouble.texi index e4993fb0014..c385d6b0b3d 100644 --- a/doc/emacs/trouble.texi +++ b/doc/emacs/trouble.texi | |||
| @@ -1488,7 +1488,7 @@ the Emacs Lisp Reference Manual | |||
| 1488 | @cindex coding standards for Emacs submissions | 1488 | @cindex coding standards for Emacs submissions |
| 1489 | 1489 | ||
| 1490 | Contributed code should follow the GNU Coding Standards | 1490 | Contributed code should follow the GNU Coding Standards |
| 1491 | @url{https://www.gnu.org/prep/standards/}. This may also be available | 1491 | @url{https://www.gnu.org/prep/standards/}. This may also be available |
| 1492 | in info on your system. | 1492 | in info on your system. |
| 1493 | 1493 | ||
| 1494 | If it doesn't, we'll need to find someone to fix the code before we | 1494 | If it doesn't, we'll need to find someone to fix the code before we |
diff --git a/doc/emacs/vc1-xtra.texi b/doc/emacs/vc1-xtra.texi index 303efa05d82..8897129d1b0 100644 --- a/doc/emacs/vc1-xtra.texi +++ b/doc/emacs/vc1-xtra.texi | |||
| @@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ current directory as a tag named @var{name} | |||
| 177 | @findex vc-retrieve-tag | 177 | @findex vc-retrieve-tag |
| 178 | @item C-x v r @var{name} @key{RET} | 178 | @item C-x v r @var{name} @key{RET} |
| 179 | For all registered files at or below the current directory level, | 179 | For all registered files at or below the current directory level, |
| 180 | retrieve the tagged revision @var{name}. This command will switch to a | 180 | retrieve the tagged revision @var{name}. This command will switch to a |
| 181 | branch if @var{name} is a branch name and your VCS distinguishes | 181 | branch if @var{name} is a branch name and your VCS distinguishes |
| 182 | branches from tags. (@code{vc-retrieve-tag}). | 182 | branches from tags. (@code{vc-retrieve-tag}). |
| 183 | 183 | ||
diff --git a/doc/lispintro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi b/doc/lispintro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi index 4649cd59962..bc4dc31bf4c 100644 --- a/doc/lispintro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi +++ b/doc/lispintro/emacs-lisp-intro.texi | |||
| @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA | |||
| 130 | @end iftex | 130 | @end iftex |
| 131 | 131 | ||
| 132 | @ifnottex | 132 | @ifnottex |
| 133 | Printed copies available from @uref{https://shop.fsf.org/}. Published by: | 133 | Printed copies available from @uref{https://shop.fsf.org/}. Published by: |
| 134 | 134 | ||
| 135 | @example | 135 | @example |
| 136 | GNU Press, https://www.fsf.org/licensing/gnu-press/ | 136 | GNU Press, https://www.fsf.org/licensing/gnu-press/ |
| @@ -1969,7 +1969,7 @@ argument is the string of characters, the second and third arguments | |||
| 1969 | are numbers that indicate the beginning (inclusive) and end | 1969 | are numbers that indicate the beginning (inclusive) and end |
| 1970 | (exclusive) of the substring. The numbers are a count of the number | 1970 | (exclusive) of the substring. The numbers are a count of the number |
| 1971 | of characters (including spaces and punctuation) from the beginning of | 1971 | of characters (including spaces and punctuation) from the beginning of |
| 1972 | the string. Note that the characters in a string are numbered from | 1972 | the string. Note that the characters in a string are numbered from |
| 1973 | zero, not one. | 1973 | zero, not one. |
| 1974 | 1974 | ||
| 1975 | @need 800 | 1975 | @need 800 |
| @@ -5314,7 +5314,7 @@ Looking at the @code{let*} expression in @code{append-to-buffer}: | |||
| 5314 | 5314 | ||
| 5315 | @noindent | 5315 | @noindent |
| 5316 | we see that @code{append-to} is bound to the value returned by the | 5316 | we see that @code{append-to} is bound to the value returned by the |
| 5317 | @w{@code{(get-buffer-create buffer)}}. On the next line, | 5317 | @w{@code{(get-buffer-create buffer)}}. On the next line, |
| 5318 | @code{append-to} is used as an argument to | 5318 | @code{append-to} is used as an argument to |
| 5319 | @code{get-buffer-window-list}; this would not be possible with the | 5319 | @code{get-buffer-window-list}; this would not be possible with the |
| 5320 | @code{let} expression. Note that @code{point} is automatically bound | 5320 | @code{let} expression. Note that @code{point} is automatically bound |
| @@ -16099,7 +16099,7 @@ placing point somewhere in the buffer, typing @kbd{M-:}, typing the | |||
| 16099 | and then typing @key{RET}. This causes Emacs to evaluate the | 16099 | and then typing @key{RET}. This causes Emacs to evaluate the |
| 16100 | expression in the minibuffer, but to use as the value of point the | 16100 | expression in the minibuffer, but to use as the value of point the |
| 16101 | position of point in the @file{*scratch*} buffer. (@kbd{M-:} is the | 16101 | position of point in the @file{*scratch*} buffer. (@kbd{M-:} is the |
| 16102 | key binding for @code{eval-expression}. Also, @code{nil} does not | 16102 | key binding for @code{eval-expression}. Also, @code{nil} does not |
| 16103 | appear in the @file{*scratch*} buffer since the expression is | 16103 | appear in the @file{*scratch*} buffer since the expression is |
| 16104 | evaluated in the minibuffer.) | 16104 | evaluated in the minibuffer.) |
| 16105 | 16105 | ||
diff --git a/doc/lispref/commands.texi b/doc/lispref/commands.texi index 6ddb70a3b9f..df8266a7157 100644 --- a/doc/lispref/commands.texi +++ b/doc/lispref/commands.texi | |||
| @@ -1741,7 +1741,7 @@ this is @code{nil}. | |||
| 1741 | @item @var{dx}, @var{dy} | 1741 | @item @var{dx}, @var{dy} |
| 1742 | These are the pixel offsets of the click relative to the top left | 1742 | These are the pixel offsets of the click relative to the top left |
| 1743 | corner of the @var{object}'s glyph that is the nearest one to the | 1743 | corner of the @var{object}'s glyph that is the nearest one to the |
| 1744 | click. The relevant @var{object}s can be either a buffer, or a string, | 1744 | click. The relevant @var{object}s can be either a buffer, or a string, |
| 1745 | or an image, see above. If @var{object} is @code{nil} or a string, | 1745 | or an image, see above. If @var{object} is @code{nil} or a string, |
| 1746 | the coordinates are relative to the top left corner of the character | 1746 | the coordinates are relative to the top left corner of the character |
| 1747 | glyph clicked on. Note that the offsets are always zero on text-mode | 1747 | glyph clicked on. Note that the offsets are always zero on text-mode |
diff --git a/doc/lispref/display.texi b/doc/lispref/display.texi index 16f60bdebf6..7564a831fd2 100644 --- a/doc/lispref/display.texi +++ b/doc/lispref/display.texi | |||
| @@ -2771,7 +2771,7 @@ width of the vertical and horizontal lines to draw; they default to (1 | |||
| 2771 | . 1). A negative horizontal or vertical width @minus{}@var{n} means | 2771 | . 1). A negative horizontal or vertical width @minus{}@var{n} means |
| 2772 | to draw a line of width @var{n} that occupies the space of the | 2772 | to draw a line of width @var{n} that occupies the space of the |
| 2773 | underlying text, thus avoiding any increase in the character height or | 2773 | underlying text, thus avoiding any increase in the character height or |
| 2774 | width. For simplification the width could be specified with only a | 2774 | width. For simplification the width could be specified with only a |
| 2775 | single number @var{n} instead of a list, such case is equivalent to | 2775 | single number @var{n} instead of a list, such case is equivalent to |
| 2776 | @code{((abs @var{n}) . @var{n})}. | 2776 | @code{((abs @var{n}) . @var{n})}. |
| 2777 | 2777 | ||
diff --git a/doc/lispref/files.texi b/doc/lispref/files.texi index 1a8f3812f1e..70db8521481 100644 --- a/doc/lispref/files.texi +++ b/doc/lispref/files.texi | |||
| @@ -2708,7 +2708,7 @@ file names (@pxref{Magic File Names}). | |||
| 2708 | 2708 | ||
| 2709 | @defmac file-name-unquote name | 2709 | @defmac file-name-unquote name |
| 2710 | This macro removes the quotation prefix @samp{/:} from the file | 2710 | This macro removes the quotation prefix @samp{/:} from the file |
| 2711 | @var{name}, if any. If @var{name} is a remote file name, the local | 2711 | @var{name}, if any. If @var{name} is a remote file name, the local |
| 2712 | part of @var{name} is unquoted. | 2712 | part of @var{name} is unquoted. |
| 2713 | @end defmac | 2713 | @end defmac |
| 2714 | 2714 | ||
| @@ -2740,7 +2740,7 @@ This function creates a temporary file and returns its name. Emacs | |||
| 2740 | creates the temporary file's name by adding to @var{prefix} some | 2740 | creates the temporary file's name by adding to @var{prefix} some |
| 2741 | random characters that are different in each Emacs job. The result is | 2741 | random characters that are different in each Emacs job. The result is |
| 2742 | guaranteed to be a newly created file, containing @var{text} if that's | 2742 | guaranteed to be a newly created file, containing @var{text} if that's |
| 2743 | given as a string and empty otherwise. On MS-DOS, this function can | 2743 | given as a string and empty otherwise. On MS-DOS, this function can |
| 2744 | truncate @var{prefix} to fit into the 8+3 file-name limits. If | 2744 | truncate @var{prefix} to fit into the 8+3 file-name limits. If |
| 2745 | @var{prefix} is a relative file name, it is expanded against | 2745 | @var{prefix} is a relative file name, it is expanded against |
| 2746 | @code{temporary-file-directory}. | 2746 | @code{temporary-file-directory}. |
diff --git a/doc/lispref/modes.texi b/doc/lispref/modes.texi index f3d4f5347b3..7c7823b5f9b 100644 --- a/doc/lispref/modes.texi +++ b/doc/lispref/modes.texi | |||
| @@ -4530,7 +4530,7 @@ and a few other such modes) has been made more generic over the years, | |||
| 4530 | so if your language seems somewhat similar to one of those languages, | 4530 | so if your language seems somewhat similar to one of those languages, |
| 4531 | you might try to use that engine. @c FIXME: documentation? | 4531 | you might try to use that engine. @c FIXME: documentation? |
| 4532 | Another one is SMIE which takes an approach in the spirit | 4532 | Another one is SMIE which takes an approach in the spirit |
| 4533 | of Lisp sexps and adapts it to non-Lisp languages. Yet another one is | 4533 | of Lisp sexps and adapts it to non-Lisp languages. Yet another one is |
| 4534 | to rely on a full-blown parser, for example, the tree-sitter library. | 4534 | to rely on a full-blown parser, for example, the tree-sitter library. |
| 4535 | 4535 | ||
| 4536 | @menu | 4536 | @menu |
diff --git a/doc/lispref/package.texi b/doc/lispref/package.texi index 60cff9d1891..eb0b4ca213c 100644 --- a/doc/lispref/package.texi +++ b/doc/lispref/package.texi | |||
| @@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ following queries: | |||
| 387 | 387 | ||
| 388 | @table @asis | 388 | @table @asis |
| 389 | @item archive-contents | 389 | @item archive-contents |
| 390 | Return a lisp form describing the archive contents. The form is a list | 390 | Return a lisp form describing the archive contents. The form is a list |
| 391 | of 'package-desc' structures (see @file{package.el}), except the first | 391 | of 'package-desc' structures (see @file{package.el}), except the first |
| 392 | element of the list is the archive version. | 392 | element of the list is the archive version. |
| 393 | 393 | ||
| @@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ Return the long description of the package. | |||
| 398 | Return the signature for the file. | 398 | Return the signature for the file. |
| 399 | 399 | ||
| 400 | @item <file name> | 400 | @item <file name> |
| 401 | Return the file. This will be the tarball for a multi-file | 401 | Return the file. This will be the tarball for a multi-file |
| 402 | package, or the single file for a simple package. | 402 | package, or the single file for a simple package. |
| 403 | 403 | ||
| 404 | @end table | 404 | @end table |
diff --git a/doc/lispref/positions.texi b/doc/lispref/positions.texi index ead7833af61..37cfe264157 100644 --- a/doc/lispref/positions.texi +++ b/doc/lispref/positions.texi | |||
| @@ -450,7 +450,7 @@ in the buffer, or in the region if the region is active. | |||
| 450 | @cindex line number | 450 | @cindex line number |
| 451 | This function returns the line number in the current buffer | 451 | This function returns the line number in the current buffer |
| 452 | corresponding to the buffer position @var{pos}. If @var{pos} is | 452 | corresponding to the buffer position @var{pos}. If @var{pos} is |
| 453 | @code{nil} or omitted, the current buffer position is used. If | 453 | @code{nil} or omitted, the current buffer position is used. If |
| 454 | @var{absolute} is @code{nil}, the default, counting starts at | 454 | @var{absolute} is @code{nil}, the default, counting starts at |
| 455 | @code{(point-min)}, so the value refers to the contents of the | 455 | @code{(point-min)}, so the value refers to the contents of the |
| 456 | accessible portion of the (potentially narrowed) buffer. If | 456 | accessible portion of the (potentially narrowed) buffer. If |
diff --git a/doc/lispref/processes.texi b/doc/lispref/processes.texi index c5fbb0fb818..53468e0d252 100644 --- a/doc/lispref/processes.texi +++ b/doc/lispref/processes.texi | |||
| @@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ stream to a different destination. | |||
| 135 | 135 | ||
| 136 | @cindex program arguments | 136 | @cindex program arguments |
| 137 | All three of the subprocess-creating functions allow specifying | 137 | All three of the subprocess-creating functions allow specifying |
| 138 | command-line arguments for the process to run. For @code{call-process} | 138 | command-line arguments for the process to run. For @code{call-process} |
| 139 | and @code{call-process-region}, these come in the form of a | 139 | and @code{call-process-region}, these come in the form of a |
| 140 | @code{&rest} argument, @var{args}. For @code{make-process}, both the | 140 | @code{&rest} argument, @var{args}. For @code{make-process}, both the |
| 141 | program to run and its command-line arguments are specified as a list | 141 | program to run and its command-line arguments are specified as a list |
diff --git a/doc/lispref/searching.texi b/doc/lispref/searching.texi index 6e3680bdb4f..7cefd581afb 100644 --- a/doc/lispref/searching.texi +++ b/doc/lispref/searching.texi | |||
| @@ -1771,7 +1771,7 @@ required for @code{rx-to-string} to work. Example: | |||
| 1771 | 1771 | ||
| 1772 | Another difference from @code{rx-let} is that the @var{bindings} are | 1772 | Another difference from @code{rx-let} is that the @var{bindings} are |
| 1773 | dynamically scoped, and thus also available in functions called from | 1773 | dynamically scoped, and thus also available in functions called from |
| 1774 | @var{body}. However, they are not visible inside functions defined in | 1774 | @var{body}. However, they are not visible inside functions defined in |
| 1775 | @var{body}. | 1775 | @var{body}. |
| 1776 | @end defmac | 1776 | @end defmac |
| 1777 | 1777 | ||
| @@ -1919,7 +1919,7 @@ symptoms less likely and help alleviate problems that do arise. | |||
| 1919 | @itemize | 1919 | @itemize |
| 1920 | @item | 1920 | @item |
| 1921 | Anchor regexps at the beginning of a line, string or buffer using | 1921 | Anchor regexps at the beginning of a line, string or buffer using |
| 1922 | zero-width assertions (@samp{^} and @code{\`}). This takes advantage | 1922 | zero-width assertions (@samp{^} and @code{\`}). This takes advantage |
| 1923 | of fast paths in the implementation and can avoid futile matching | 1923 | of fast paths in the implementation and can avoid futile matching |
| 1924 | attempts. Other zero-width assertions may also bring benefits by | 1924 | attempts. Other zero-width assertions may also bring benefits by |
| 1925 | causing a match to fail early. | 1925 | causing a match to fail early. |
diff --git a/doc/lispref/sequences.texi b/doc/lispref/sequences.texi index d5695e4c83d..9b0a0d74f30 100644 --- a/doc/lispref/sequences.texi +++ b/doc/lispref/sequences.texi | |||
| @@ -937,7 +937,7 @@ use instead of the default @code{equal}. | |||
| 937 | 937 | ||
| 938 | @defun seq-set-equal-p sequence1 sequence2 &optional testfn | 938 | @defun seq-set-equal-p sequence1 sequence2 &optional testfn |
| 939 | This function checks whether @var{sequence1} and @var{sequence2} | 939 | This function checks whether @var{sequence1} and @var{sequence2} |
| 940 | contain the same elements, regardless of the order. If the optional | 940 | contain the same elements, regardless of the order. If the optional |
| 941 | argument @var{testfn} is non-@code{nil}, it is a function of two | 941 | argument @var{testfn} is non-@code{nil}, it is a function of two |
| 942 | arguments to use instead of the default @code{equal}. | 942 | arguments to use instead of the default @code{equal}. |
| 943 | 943 | ||
diff --git a/doc/lispref/streams.texi b/doc/lispref/streams.texi index 86ec82b66a1..a48e6380d32 100644 --- a/doc/lispref/streams.texi +++ b/doc/lispref/streams.texi | |||
| @@ -970,7 +970,7 @@ you can use, see the variable's documentation string. | |||
| 970 | @defvar print-integers-as-characters | 970 | @defvar print-integers-as-characters |
| 971 | When this variable is non-@code{nil}, integers that represent | 971 | When this variable is non-@code{nil}, integers that represent |
| 972 | graphic base characters will be printed using Lisp character syntax | 972 | graphic base characters will be printed using Lisp character syntax |
| 973 | (@pxref{Basic Char Syntax}). Other numbers are printed the usual way. | 973 | (@pxref{Basic Char Syntax}). Other numbers are printed the usual way. |
| 974 | For example, the list @code{(4 65 -1 10)} would be printed as | 974 | For example, the list @code{(4 65 -1 10)} would be printed as |
| 975 | @samp{(4 ?A -1 ?\n)}. | 975 | @samp{(4 ?A -1 ?\n)}. |
| 976 | 976 | ||
diff --git a/doc/lispref/variables.texi b/doc/lispref/variables.texi index 0ed1936cd84..76f15b2595c 100644 --- a/doc/lispref/variables.texi +++ b/doc/lispref/variables.texi | |||
| @@ -2613,7 +2613,7 @@ compatibility. You can do this with @code{defvaralias}. | |||
| 2613 | 2613 | ||
| 2614 | @defun defvaralias new-alias base-variable &optional docstring | 2614 | @defun defvaralias new-alias base-variable &optional docstring |
| 2615 | This function defines the symbol @var{new-alias} as a variable alias | 2615 | This function defines the symbol @var{new-alias} as a variable alias |
| 2616 | for symbol @var{base-variable}. This means that retrieving the value | 2616 | for symbol @var{base-variable}. This means that retrieving the value |
| 2617 | of @var{new-alias} returns the value of @var{base-variable}, and | 2617 | of @var{new-alias} returns the value of @var{base-variable}, and |
| 2618 | changing the value of @var{new-alias} changes the value of | 2618 | changing the value of @var{new-alias} changes the value of |
| 2619 | @var{base-variable}. The two aliased variable names always share the | 2619 | @var{base-variable}. The two aliased variable names always share the |
diff --git a/doc/man/etags.1 b/doc/man/etags.1 index c567c51d7ef..9b8df50a6bb 100644 --- a/doc/man/etags.1 +++ b/doc/man/etags.1 | |||
| @@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ of \- means standard output; overrides default \fBTAGS\fP or \fBtags\fP. | |||
| 171 | 171 | ||
| 172 | Make tags based on regexp matching for the files following this option, | 172 | Make tags based on regexp matching for the files following this option, |
| 173 | in addition to the tags made with the standard parsing based on | 173 | in addition to the tags made with the standard parsing based on |
| 174 | language. May be freely intermixed with filenames and the \fB\-R\fP | 174 | language. May be freely intermixed with filenames and the \fB\-R\fP |
| 175 | option. The regexps are cumulative, i.e., each such option will add to | 175 | option. The regexps are cumulative, i.e., each such option will add to |
| 176 | the previous ones. The regexps are of one of the forms: | 176 | the previous ones. The regexps are of one of the forms: |
| 177 | .br | 177 | .br |
diff --git a/doc/misc/auth.texi b/doc/misc/auth.texi index 8d802be535c..bb4beb38837 100644 --- a/doc/misc/auth.texi +++ b/doc/misc/auth.texi | |||
| @@ -136,12 +136,12 @@ You can use spaces inside a password or other token by surrounding the | |||
| 136 | token with either single or double quotes. | 136 | token with either single or double quotes. |
| 137 | 137 | ||
| 138 | You can use apostrophes inside a password or other token by | 138 | You can use apostrophes inside a password or other token by |
| 139 | surrounding it with double quotes, e.g., @code{"he'llo"}. Similarly you | 139 | surrounding it with double quotes, e.g., @code{"he'llo"}. Similarly you |
| 140 | can use double quotes inside a password or other token by surrounding | 140 | can use double quotes inside a password or other token by surrounding |
| 141 | it with apostrophes, e.g., @code{'he"llo'}. You can't mix both (so a | 141 | it with apostrophes, e.g., @code{'he"llo'}. You can't mix both (so a |
| 142 | password or other token can't have both apostrophes and double quotes). | 142 | password or other token can't have both apostrophes and double quotes). |
| 143 | 143 | ||
| 144 | All this is optional. You could just say (but we don't recommend it, | 144 | All this is optional. You could just say (but we don't recommend it, |
| 145 | we're just showing that it's possible) | 145 | we're just showing that it's possible) |
| 146 | 146 | ||
| 147 | @example | 147 | @example |
| @@ -267,7 +267,7 @@ earlier. Since Tramp has about 88 connection methods, this may be | |||
| 267 | necessary if you have an unusual (see earlier comment on those) setup. | 267 | necessary if you have an unusual (see earlier comment on those) setup. |
| 268 | 268 | ||
| 269 | The netrc format is directly translated into JSON, if you are into | 269 | The netrc format is directly translated into JSON, if you are into |
| 270 | that sort of thing. Just point to a JSON file with entries like this: | 270 | that sort of thing. Just point to a JSON file with entries like this: |
| 271 | 271 | ||
| 272 | @example | 272 | @example |
| 273 | [ | 273 | [ |
| @@ -501,7 +501,9 @@ The username can also be expressed as a prefix, separated from the | |||
| 501 | host with an at-sign (@code{@@}). | 501 | host with an at-sign (@code{@@}). |
| 502 | 502 | ||
| 503 | @item gnu.org:22.gpg | 503 | @item gnu.org:22.gpg |
| 504 | The port (aka. service) to match can only be expressed after the host and separated with a colon (@code{:}). The separator can be changed through the @code{auth-source-pass-port-separator} variable. | 504 | The port (aka. service) to match can only be expressed after the host |
| 505 | and separated with a colon (@code{:}). The separator can be changed | ||
| 506 | through the @code{auth-source-pass-port-separator} variable. | ||
| 505 | 507 | ||
| 506 | @item gnu.org:22/rms.gpg | 508 | @item gnu.org:22/rms.gpg |
| 507 | 509 | ||
diff --git a/doc/misc/autotype.texi b/doc/misc/autotype.texi index d927816c492..4bd07c8d312 100644 --- a/doc/misc/autotype.texi +++ b/doc/misc/autotype.texi | |||
| @@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ be inserted. | |||
| 290 | It can also be a function, which allows doing various things. The function | 290 | It can also be a function, which allows doing various things. The function |
| 291 | can simply insert some text, indeed, it can be skeleton command (@pxref{Using | 291 | can simply insert some text, indeed, it can be skeleton command (@pxref{Using |
| 292 | Skeletons}). It can be a lambda function which will for example conditionally | 292 | Skeletons}). It can be a lambda function which will for example conditionally |
| 293 | call another function. Or it can even reset the mode for the buffer. If you | 293 | call another function. Or it can even reset the mode for the buffer. If you |
| 294 | want to perform several such actions in order, you use a vector, i.e., several | 294 | want to perform several such actions in order, you use a vector, i.e., several |
| 295 | of the above elements between square brackets (@samp{[@r{@dots{}}]}). | 295 | of the above elements between square brackets (@samp{[@r{@dots{}}]}). |
| 296 | 296 | ||
diff --git a/doc/misc/bovine.texi b/doc/misc/bovine.texi index 5cef9ffbb93..f4eb0784cb2 100644 --- a/doc/misc/bovine.texi +++ b/doc/misc/bovine.texi | |||
| @@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ semantic list. | |||
| 346 | @item (EXPANDFULL @var{$1} @var{nonterminal} @var{depth}) | 346 | @item (EXPANDFULL @var{$1} @var{nonterminal} @var{depth}) |
| 347 | Is like @code{EXPAND}, except that the parser will iterate over | 347 | Is like @code{EXPAND}, except that the parser will iterate over |
| 348 | @var{nonterminal} until there are no more matches. (The same way the | 348 | @var{nonterminal} until there are no more matches. (The same way the |
| 349 | parser iterates over the starting rule (@pxref{Starting Rules}). This | 349 | parser iterates over the starting rule (@pxref{Starting Rules}). This |
| 350 | lets you have much simpler rules in this specific case, and also lets | 350 | lets you have much simpler rules in this specific case, and also lets |
| 351 | you have positional information in the returned tokens, and error | 351 | you have positional information in the returned tokens, and error |
| 352 | skipping. | 352 | skipping. |
diff --git a/doc/misc/calc.texi b/doc/misc/calc.texi index 54909c130c3..384ad889ae1 100644 --- a/doc/misc/calc.texi +++ b/doc/misc/calc.texi | |||
| @@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ To print the Calc manual in one huge tome, you will need the | |||
| 355 | Emacs source, which contains the source code to this manual, | 355 | Emacs source, which contains the source code to this manual, |
| 356 | @file{calc.texi}. Change to the @file{doc/misc} subdirectory of the | 356 | @file{calc.texi}. Change to the @file{doc/misc} subdirectory of the |
| 357 | Emacs source distribution, which contains source code for this manual, | 357 | Emacs source distribution, which contains source code for this manual, |
| 358 | and type @kbd{make calc.pdf}. (Don't worry if you get some ``overfull | 358 | and type @kbd{make calc.pdf}. (Don't worry if you get some ``overfull |
| 359 | box'' warnings while @TeX{} runs.) The result will be this entire | 359 | box'' warnings while @TeX{} runs.) The result will be this entire |
| 360 | manual as a pdf file. | 360 | manual as a pdf file. |
| 361 | @end ifnottex | 361 | @end ifnottex |
| @@ -524,7 +524,7 @@ matrix into a | |||
| 524 | @infoline 2x3 | 524 | @infoline 2x3 |
| 525 | matrix. Type @w{@kbd{v u}} to unpack the rows into two separate | 525 | matrix. Type @w{@kbd{v u}} to unpack the rows into two separate |
| 526 | vectors. Now type @w{@kbd{V R + @key{TAB} V R +}} to compute the sums | 526 | vectors. Now type @w{@kbd{V R + @key{TAB} V R +}} to compute the sums |
| 527 | of the two original columns. (There is also a special | 527 | of the two original columns. (There is also a special |
| 528 | grab-and-sum-columns command, @kbd{C-x * :}.) | 528 | grab-and-sum-columns command, @kbd{C-x * :}.) |
| 529 | 529 | ||
| 530 | @strong{Units conversion.} Units are entered algebraically. | 530 | @strong{Units conversion.} Units are entered algebraically. |
| @@ -929,7 +929,7 @@ is | |||
| 929 | Calc has added annotations to the file to help it remember the modes | 929 | Calc has added annotations to the file to help it remember the modes |
| 930 | that were used for this formula. They are formatted like comments | 930 | that were used for this formula. They are formatted like comments |
| 931 | in the @TeX{} typesetting language, just in case you are using @TeX{} or | 931 | in the @TeX{} typesetting language, just in case you are using @TeX{} or |
| 932 | @LaTeX{}. (In this example @TeX{} is not being used, so you might want | 932 | @LaTeX{}. (In this example @TeX{} is not being used, so you might want |
| 933 | to move these comments up to the top of the file or otherwise put them | 933 | to move these comments up to the top of the file or otherwise put them |
| 934 | out of the way.) | 934 | out of the way.) |
| 935 | 935 | ||
| @@ -1174,7 +1174,7 @@ that arbitrary-size integers were just as easy as large integers. | |||
| 1174 | Arbitrary floating-point precision was the logical next step. Also, | 1174 | Arbitrary floating-point precision was the logical next step. Also, |
| 1175 | since the large integer arithmetic was there anyway it seemed only | 1175 | since the large integer arithmetic was there anyway it seemed only |
| 1176 | fair to give the user direct access to it, which in turn made it | 1176 | fair to give the user direct access to it, which in turn made it |
| 1177 | practical to support fractions as well as floats. All these features | 1177 | practical to support fractions as well as floats. All these features |
| 1178 | inspired me to look around for other data types that might be worth | 1178 | inspired me to look around for other data types that might be worth |
| 1179 | having. | 1179 | having. |
| 1180 | 1180 | ||
| @@ -5762,7 +5762,7 @@ which in algebraic notation is written like @samp{ninteg(f(t), t, 0, x)} | |||
| 5762 | with any integrand @samp{f(t)}. Define a @kbd{z s} command and | 5762 | with any integrand @samp{f(t)}. Define a @kbd{z s} command and |
| 5763 | @code{Si} function that implement this. You will need to edit the | 5763 | @code{Si} function that implement this. You will need to edit the |
| 5764 | default argument list a bit. As a test, @samp{Si(1)} should return | 5764 | default argument list a bit. As a test, @samp{Si(1)} should return |
| 5765 | 0.946083. (If you don't get this answer, you might want to check that | 5765 | 0.946083. (If you don't get this answer, you might want to check that |
| 5766 | Calc is in Radians mode. Also, @code{ninteg} will run a lot faster if | 5766 | Calc is in Radians mode. Also, @code{ninteg} will run a lot faster if |
| 5767 | you reduce the precision to, say, six digits beforehand.) | 5767 | you reduce the precision to, say, six digits beforehand.) |
| 5768 | @xref{Programming Answer 1, 1}. (@bullet{}) | 5768 | @xref{Programming Answer 1, 1}. (@bullet{}) |
| @@ -9758,7 +9758,7 @@ by a zero) resets the Calculator to its initial state. This clears | |||
| 9758 | the stack, resets all the modes to their initial values (the values | 9758 | the stack, resets all the modes to their initial values (the values |
| 9759 | that were saved with @kbd{m m} (@code{calc-save-modes})), clears the | 9759 | that were saved with @kbd{m m} (@code{calc-save-modes})), clears the |
| 9760 | caches (@pxref{Caches}), and so on. (It does @emph{not} erase the | 9760 | caches (@pxref{Caches}), and so on. (It does @emph{not} erase the |
| 9761 | values of any variables.) With an argument of 0, Calc will be reset to | 9761 | values of any variables.) With an argument of 0, Calc will be reset to |
| 9762 | its default state; namely, the modes will be given their default values. | 9762 | its default state; namely, the modes will be given their default values. |
| 9763 | With a positive prefix argument, @kbd{C-x * 0} preserves the contents of | 9763 | With a positive prefix argument, @kbd{C-x * 0} preserves the contents of |
| 9764 | the stack but resets everything else to its initial state; with a | 9764 | the stack but resets everything else to its initial state; with a |
| @@ -10254,7 +10254,7 @@ specified number of operations. When the Calculator is quit, as with | |||
| 10254 | the @kbd{q} (@code{calc-quit}) command, the undo history will be | 10254 | the @kbd{q} (@code{calc-quit}) command, the undo history will be |
| 10255 | truncated to the length of the customizable variable | 10255 | truncated to the length of the customizable variable |
| 10256 | @code{calc-undo-length} (@pxref{Customizing Calc}), which by default | 10256 | @code{calc-undo-length} (@pxref{Customizing Calc}), which by default |
| 10257 | is @expr{100}. (Recall that @kbd{C-x * c} is synonymous with | 10257 | is @expr{100}. (Recall that @kbd{C-x * c} is synonymous with |
| 10258 | @code{calc-quit} while inside the Calculator; this also truncates the | 10258 | @code{calc-quit} while inside the Calculator; this also truncates the |
| 10259 | undo history.) | 10259 | undo history.) |
| 10260 | 10260 | ||
| @@ -11050,8 +11050,8 @@ calendar. | |||
| 11050 | 11050 | ||
| 11051 | Some calendars attempt to mimic the historical situation by using the | 11051 | Some calendars attempt to mimic the historical situation by using the |
| 11052 | Gregorian calendar for recent dates and the Julian calendar for older | 11052 | Gregorian calendar for recent dates and the Julian calendar for older |
| 11053 | dates. The @code{cal} program in most Unix implementations does this, | 11053 | dates. The @code{cal} program in most Unix implementations does this, |
| 11054 | for example. While January 1 wasn't always the beginning of a calendar | 11054 | for example. While January 1 wasn't always the beginning of a calendar |
| 11055 | year, these hybrid calendars still use January 1 as the beginning of | 11055 | year, these hybrid calendars still use January 1 as the beginning of |
| 11056 | the year even for older dates. The customizable variable | 11056 | the year even for older dates. The customizable variable |
| 11057 | @code{calc-gregorian-switch} (@pxref{Customizing Calc}) can be set to | 11057 | @code{calc-gregorian-switch} (@pxref{Customizing Calc}) can be set to |
| @@ -11405,7 +11405,7 @@ means a variable is random, and its value could | |||
| 11405 | be anything but is ``probably'' within one | 11405 | be anything but is ``probably'' within one |
| 11406 | @texline @math{\sigma} | 11406 | @texline @math{\sigma} |
| 11407 | @infoline @var{sigma} | 11407 | @infoline @var{sigma} |
| 11408 | of the mean value @expr{x}. An interval | 11408 | of the mean value @expr{x}. An interval |
| 11409 | `@tfn{[}@var{a} @tfn{..@:} @var{b}@tfn{]}' means a | 11409 | `@tfn{[}@var{a} @tfn{..@:} @var{b}@tfn{]}' means a |
| 11410 | variable's value is unknown, but guaranteed to lie in the specified | 11410 | variable's value is unknown, but guaranteed to lie in the specified |
| 11411 | range. Error forms are statistical or ``average case'' approximations; | 11411 | range. Error forms are statistical or ``average case'' approximations; |
| @@ -11862,7 +11862,7 @@ any portion of a vector or formula on the stack. | |||
| 11862 | @cindex Moving stack entries | 11862 | @cindex Moving stack entries |
| 11863 | The command @kbd{C-x C-t} (@code{calc-transpose-lines}) will transpose | 11863 | The command @kbd{C-x C-t} (@code{calc-transpose-lines}) will transpose |
| 11864 | the stack object determined by the point with the stack object at the | 11864 | the stack object determined by the point with the stack object at the |
| 11865 | next higher level. For example, with @samp{10 20 30 40 50} on the | 11865 | next higher level. For example, with @samp{10 20 30 40 50} on the |
| 11866 | stack and the point on the line containing @samp{30}, @kbd{C-x C-t} | 11866 | stack and the point on the line containing @samp{30}, @kbd{C-x C-t} |
| 11867 | creates @samp{10 20 40 30 50}. More generally, @kbd{C-x C-t} acts on | 11867 | creates @samp{10 20 40 30 50}. More generally, @kbd{C-x C-t} acts on |
| 11868 | the stack objects determined by the current point (and mark) similar | 11868 | the stack objects determined by the current point (and mark) similar |
| @@ -11871,7 +11871,7 @@ lines. With argument @var{n}, @kbd{C-x C-t} will move the stack object | |||
| 11871 | at the level above the current point and move it past N other objects; | 11871 | at the level above the current point and move it past N other objects; |
| 11872 | for example, with @samp{10 20 30 40 50} on the stack and the point on | 11872 | for example, with @samp{10 20 30 40 50} on the stack and the point on |
| 11873 | the line containing @samp{30}, @kbd{C-u 2 C-x C-t} creates | 11873 | the line containing @samp{30}, @kbd{C-u 2 C-x C-t} creates |
| 11874 | @samp{10 40 20 30 50}. With an argument of 0, @kbd{C-x C-t} will switch | 11874 | @samp{10 40 20 30 50}. With an argument of 0, @kbd{C-x C-t} will switch |
| 11875 | the stack objects at the levels determined by the point and the mark. | 11875 | the stack objects at the levels determined by the point and the mark. |
| 11876 | 11876 | ||
| 11877 | @node Editing Stack Entries | 11877 | @node Editing Stack Entries |
| @@ -12062,14 +12062,14 @@ the stack contains the sole number 5, but after @kbd{2 @key{RET} 3 K +}, | |||
| 12062 | the stack contains the arguments and the result: @samp{2 3 5}. | 12062 | the stack contains the arguments and the result: @samp{2 3 5}. |
| 12063 | 12063 | ||
| 12064 | With the exception of keyboard macros, this works for all commands that | 12064 | With the exception of keyboard macros, this works for all commands that |
| 12065 | take arguments off the stack. (To avoid potentially unpleasant behavior, | 12065 | take arguments off the stack. (To avoid potentially unpleasant behavior, |
| 12066 | a @kbd{K} prefix before a keyboard macro will be ignored. A @kbd{K} | 12066 | a @kbd{K} prefix before a keyboard macro will be ignored. A @kbd{K} |
| 12067 | prefix called @emph{within} the keyboard macro will still take effect.) | 12067 | prefix called @emph{within} the keyboard macro will still take effect.) |
| 12068 | As another example, @kbd{K a s} simplifies a formula, pushing the | 12068 | As another example, @kbd{K a s} simplifies a formula, pushing the |
| 12069 | simplified version of the formula onto the stack after the original | 12069 | simplified version of the formula onto the stack after the original |
| 12070 | formula (rather than replacing the original formula). Note that you | 12070 | formula (rather than replacing the original formula). Note that you |
| 12071 | could get the same effect by typing @kbd{@key{RET} a s}, copying the | 12071 | could get the same effect by typing @kbd{@key{RET} a s}, copying the |
| 12072 | formula and then simplifying the copy. One difference is that for a very | 12072 | formula and then simplifying the copy. One difference is that for a very |
| 12073 | large formula the time taken to format the intermediate copy in | 12073 | large formula the time taken to format the intermediate copy in |
| 12074 | @kbd{@key{RET} a s} could be noticeable; @kbd{K a s} would avoid this | 12074 | @kbd{@key{RET} a s} could be noticeable; @kbd{K a s} would avoid this |
| 12075 | extra work. | 12075 | extra work. |
| @@ -13171,7 +13171,7 @@ Calc can display @expr{w}-bit integers using two's complement | |||
| 13171 | notation, although this is most useful with the binary, octal and | 13171 | notation, although this is most useful with the binary, octal and |
| 13172 | hexadecimal display modes. This option is selected by using the | 13172 | hexadecimal display modes. This option is selected by using the |
| 13173 | @kbd{O} option prefix before setting the display radix, and a negative word | 13173 | @kbd{O} option prefix before setting the display radix, and a negative word |
| 13174 | size might be appropriate (@pxref{Binary Functions}). In two's | 13174 | size might be appropriate (@pxref{Binary Functions}). In two's |
| 13175 | complement notation, the integers in the (nearly) symmetric interval | 13175 | complement notation, the integers in the (nearly) symmetric interval |
| 13176 | from | 13176 | from |
| 13177 | @texline @math{-2^{w-1}} | 13177 | @texline @math{-2^{w-1}} |
| @@ -13502,7 +13502,7 @@ date representation, this week goes from 2013-W01-1 (December 31, | |||
| 13502 | All three ISO 8601 representations arrange the numbers from most | 13502 | All three ISO 8601 representations arrange the numbers from most |
| 13503 | significant to least significant; as well as being unambiguous | 13503 | significant to least significant; as well as being unambiguous |
| 13504 | representations, they are easy to sort since chronological order in | 13504 | representations, they are easy to sort since chronological order in |
| 13505 | this formats corresponds to lexicographical order. The hyphens are | 13505 | this formats corresponds to lexicographical order. The hyphens are |
| 13506 | sometimes omitted. | 13506 | sometimes omitted. |
| 13507 | 13507 | ||
| 13508 | The ISO 8601 standard uses a 24 hour clock; a particular time is | 13508 | The ISO 8601 standard uses a 24 hour clock; a particular time is |
| @@ -13744,7 +13744,7 @@ order), then all other characters are ignored and this information | |||
| 13744 | determines the date. Otherwise, all words and numbers are isolated | 13744 | determines the date. Otherwise, all words and numbers are isolated |
| 13745 | from the string; other characters are ignored. All words must be | 13745 | from the string; other characters are ignored. All words must be |
| 13746 | either month names or day-of-week names (the latter of which are | 13746 | either month names or day-of-week names (the latter of which are |
| 13747 | ignored). Names can be written in full or as three-letter | 13747 | ignored). Names can be written in full or as three-letter |
| 13748 | abbreviations. | 13748 | abbreviations. |
| 13749 | 13749 | ||
| 13750 | Large numbers, or numbers with @samp{+} or @samp{-} signs, | 13750 | Large numbers, or numbers with @samp{+} or @samp{-} signs, |
| @@ -14205,9 +14205,9 @@ quotients are written using @code{\over} in @TeX{} mode (as in | |||
| 14205 | @code{\choose} in @TeX{} mode (as in @code{@{a \choose b@}}) and | 14205 | @code{\choose} in @TeX{} mode (as in @code{@{a \choose b@}}) and |
| 14206 | @code{\binom} in @LaTeX{} mode (as in @code{\binom@{a@}@{b@}}). | 14206 | @code{\binom} in @LaTeX{} mode (as in @code{\binom@{a@}@{b@}}). |
| 14207 | Interval forms are written with @code{\ldots}, and error forms are | 14207 | Interval forms are written with @code{\ldots}, and error forms are |
| 14208 | written with @code{\pm}. Absolute values are written as in | 14208 | written with @code{\pm}. Absolute values are written as in |
| 14209 | @samp{|x + 1|}, and the floor and ceiling functions are written with | 14209 | @samp{|x + 1|}, and the floor and ceiling functions are written with |
| 14210 | @code{\lfloor}, @code{\rfloor}, etc. The words @code{\left} and | 14210 | @code{\lfloor}, @code{\rfloor}, etc. The words @code{\left} and |
| 14211 | @code{\right} are ignored when reading formulas in @TeX{} and @LaTeX{} | 14211 | @code{\right} are ignored when reading formulas in @TeX{} and @LaTeX{} |
| 14212 | modes. Both @code{inf} and @code{uinf} are written as @code{\infty}; | 14212 | modes. Both @code{inf} and @code{uinf} are written as @code{\infty}; |
| 14213 | when read, @code{\infty} always translates to @code{inf}. | 14213 | when read, @code{\infty} always translates to @code{inf}. |
| @@ -16290,7 +16290,7 @@ interpretations; the expression @samp{a/b*c} should be written | |||
| 16290 | @samp{(a/b)*c} or @samp{a/(b*c)}, as appropriate. Without the | 16290 | @samp{(a/b)*c} or @samp{a/(b*c)}, as appropriate. Without the |
| 16291 | parentheses, Calc will interpret @samp{a/b*c} as @samp{a/(b*c)}, since | 16291 | parentheses, Calc will interpret @samp{a/b*c} as @samp{a/(b*c)}, since |
| 16292 | in algebraic entry Calc gives division a lower precedence than | 16292 | in algebraic entry Calc gives division a lower precedence than |
| 16293 | multiplication. (This is not standard across all computer languages, and | 16293 | multiplication. (This is not standard across all computer languages, and |
| 16294 | Calc may change the precedence depending on the language mode being used. | 16294 | Calc may change the precedence depending on the language mode being used. |
| 16295 | @xref{Language Modes}.) This default ordering can be changed by setting | 16295 | @xref{Language Modes}.) This default ordering can be changed by setting |
| 16296 | the customizable variable @code{calc-multiplication-has-precedence} to | 16296 | the customizable variable @code{calc-multiplication-has-precedence} to |
| @@ -17456,7 +17456,7 @@ converting into a generalized time zone (see below). | |||
| 17456 | The Lisp function @code{math-prev-weekday-in-month} is useful for | 17456 | The Lisp function @code{math-prev-weekday-in-month} is useful for |
| 17457 | daylight saving computations. This is an internal version of | 17457 | daylight saving computations. This is an internal version of |
| 17458 | the user-level @code{pwday} function described in the previous | 17458 | the user-level @code{pwday} function described in the previous |
| 17459 | section. It takes four arguments: The floating-point date value, | 17459 | section. It takes four arguments: The floating-point date value, |
| 17460 | the corresponding six-element date list, the day-of-month number, | 17460 | the corresponding six-element date list, the day-of-month number, |
| 17461 | and the weekday number (0--6). | 17461 | and the weekday number (0--6). |
| 17462 | 17462 | ||
| @@ -20150,7 +20150,7 @@ that the counts in the result vector don't add up to the length of the | |||
| 20150 | input vector.) | 20150 | input vector.) |
| 20151 | 20151 | ||
| 20152 | If no prefix is given, then you will be prompted for a vector which | 20152 | If no prefix is given, then you will be prompted for a vector which |
| 20153 | will be used to determine the bins. (If a positive integer is given at | 20153 | will be used to determine the bins. (If a positive integer is given at |
| 20154 | this prompt, it will be still treated as if it were given as a | 20154 | this prompt, it will be still treated as if it were given as a |
| 20155 | prefix.) Each bin will consist of the interval of numbers closest to | 20155 | prefix.) Each bin will consist of the interval of numbers closest to |
| 20156 | the corresponding number of this new vector; if the vector | 20156 | the corresponding number of this new vector; if the vector |
| @@ -21636,7 +21636,7 @@ to | |||
| 21636 | 21636 | ||
| 21637 | @noindent | 21637 | @noindent |
| 21638 | Every character not part of the sub-formula @samp{b} has been changed | 21638 | Every character not part of the sub-formula @samp{b} has been changed |
| 21639 | to a dot. (If the customizable variable | 21639 | to a dot. (If the customizable variable |
| 21640 | @code{calc-highlight-selections-with-faces} is non-@code{nil}, then the characters | 21640 | @code{calc-highlight-selections-with-faces} is non-@code{nil}, then the characters |
| 21641 | not part of the sub-formula are de-emphasized by using a less | 21641 | not part of the sub-formula are de-emphasized by using a less |
| 21642 | noticeable face instead of using dots. @pxref{Displaying Selections}.) | 21642 | noticeable face instead of using dots. @pxref{Displaying Selections}.) |
| @@ -22837,12 +22837,12 @@ suitable numbers. | |||
| 22837 | This section describes all simplifications that are performed by | 22837 | This section describes all simplifications that are performed by |
| 22838 | the algebraic simplification mode, which is the default simplification | 22838 | the algebraic simplification mode, which is the default simplification |
| 22839 | mode. If you have switched to a different simplification mode, you can | 22839 | mode. If you have switched to a different simplification mode, you can |
| 22840 | switch back with the @kbd{m A} command. Even in other simplification | 22840 | switch back with the @kbd{m A} command. Even in other simplification |
| 22841 | modes, the @kbd{a s} command will use these algebraic simplifications to | 22841 | modes, the @kbd{a s} command will use these algebraic simplifications to |
| 22842 | simplify the formula. | 22842 | simplify the formula. |
| 22843 | 22843 | ||
| 22844 | There is a variable, @code{AlgSimpRules}, in which you can put rewrites | 22844 | There is a variable, @code{AlgSimpRules}, in which you can put rewrites |
| 22845 | to be applied. Its use is analogous to @code{EvalRules}, | 22845 | to be applied. Its use is analogous to @code{EvalRules}, |
| 22846 | but without the special restrictions. Basically, the simplifier does | 22846 | but without the special restrictions. Basically, the simplifier does |
| 22847 | @samp{@w{a r} AlgSimpRules} with an infinite repeat count on the whole | 22847 | @samp{@w{a r} AlgSimpRules} with an infinite repeat count on the whole |
| 22848 | expression being simplified, then it traverses the expression applying | 22848 | expression being simplified, then it traverses the expression applying |
| @@ -22991,7 +22991,7 @@ function; for example, @expr{1/@tfn{sec}(x)} is simplified to | |||
| 22991 | hyperbolic functions are also handled. | 22991 | hyperbolic functions are also handled. |
| 22992 | 22992 | ||
| 22993 | Trigonometric functions of their inverse functions are | 22993 | Trigonometric functions of their inverse functions are |
| 22994 | simplified. The expression @expr{@tfn{sin}(@tfn{arcsin}(x))} is | 22994 | simplified. The expression @expr{@tfn{sin}(@tfn{arcsin}(x))} is |
| 22995 | simplified to @expr{x}, and similarly for @code{cos} and @code{tan}. | 22995 | simplified to @expr{x}, and similarly for @code{cos} and @code{tan}. |
| 22996 | Trigonometric functions of inverses of different trigonometric | 22996 | Trigonometric functions of inverses of different trigonometric |
| 22997 | functions can also be simplified, as in @expr{@tfn{sin}(@tfn{arccos}(x))} | 22997 | functions can also be simplified, as in @expr{@tfn{sin}(@tfn{arccos}(x))} |
| @@ -27646,7 +27646,7 @@ simplifications. | |||
| 27646 | Most of the special limitations for @code{EvalRules} don't apply to | 27646 | Most of the special limitations for @code{EvalRules} don't apply to |
| 27647 | @code{AlgSimpRules}. Calc simply does an @kbd{a r AlgSimpRules} | 27647 | @code{AlgSimpRules}. Calc simply does an @kbd{a r AlgSimpRules} |
| 27648 | command with an infinite repeat count as the first step of algebraic | 27648 | command with an infinite repeat count as the first step of algebraic |
| 27649 | simplifications. It then applies its own built-in simplifications | 27649 | simplifications. It then applies its own built-in simplifications |
| 27650 | throughout the formula, and then repeats these two steps (along with | 27650 | throughout the formula, and then repeats these two steps (along with |
| 27651 | applying the default simplifications) until no further changes are | 27651 | applying the default simplifications) until no further changes are |
| 27652 | possible. | 27652 | possible. |
| @@ -27883,7 +27883,7 @@ while typing @kbd{u c au/yr @key{RET}} produces | |||
| 27883 | If the units you request are inconsistent with the original units, the | 27883 | If the units you request are inconsistent with the original units, the |
| 27884 | number will be converted into your units times whatever ``remainder'' | 27884 | number will be converted into your units times whatever ``remainder'' |
| 27885 | units are left over. For example, converting @samp{55 mph} into acres | 27885 | units are left over. For example, converting @samp{55 mph} into acres |
| 27886 | produces @samp{6.08e-3 acre / (m s)}. Remainder units are expressed in terms of | 27886 | produces @samp{6.08e-3 acre / (m s)}. Remainder units are expressed in terms of |
| 27887 | ``fundamental'' units like @samp{m} and @samp{s}, regardless of the | 27887 | ``fundamental'' units like @samp{m} and @samp{s}, regardless of the |
| 27888 | input units. | 27888 | input units. |
| 27889 | 27889 | ||
| @@ -28257,7 +28257,7 @@ is defined to be | |||
| 28257 | @infoline @math{10 log10(P1/P0) dB}. | 28257 | @infoline @math{10 log10(P1/P0) dB}. |
| 28258 | @texline @math{10 \log_{10}(P_{1}/P_{0}) {\rm dB}}. | 28258 | @texline @math{10 \log_{10}(P_{1}/P_{0}) {\rm dB}}. |
| 28259 | (The factor of 10 is because a decibel, as its name implies, is | 28259 | (The factor of 10 is because a decibel, as its name implies, is |
| 28260 | one-tenth of a bel. The bel, named after Alexander Graham Bell, was | 28260 | one-tenth of a bel. The bel, named after Alexander Graham Bell, was |
| 28261 | considered to be too large of a unit and was effectively replaced by | 28261 | considered to be too large of a unit and was effectively replaced by |
| 28262 | the decibel.) If @math{F} is a field quantity with power | 28262 | the decibel.) If @math{F} is a field quantity with power |
| 28263 | @math{P=k F^2}, then a reference quantity of | 28263 | @math{P=k F^2}, then a reference quantity of |
| @@ -28353,10 +28353,10 @@ capital @kbd{O} prefix is used. | |||
| 28353 | @tindex lufquant | 28353 | @tindex lufquant |
| 28354 | The @kbd{l q} (@code{calc-lu-quant}) [@code{lupquant}] | 28354 | The @kbd{l q} (@code{calc-lu-quant}) [@code{lupquant}] |
| 28355 | command computes the power quantity corresponding to a given number of | 28355 | command computes the power quantity corresponding to a given number of |
| 28356 | logarithmic units. With the capital @kbd{O} prefix, @kbd{O l q}, the | 28356 | logarithmic units. With the capital @kbd{O} prefix, @kbd{O l q}, the |
| 28357 | reference level will be read from the top of the stack. (In an | 28357 | reference level will be read from the top of the stack. (In an |
| 28358 | algebraic formula, @code{lupquant} can be given an optional second | 28358 | algebraic formula, @code{lupquant} can be given an optional second |
| 28359 | argument which will be used for the reference level.) For example, | 28359 | argument which will be used for the reference level.) For example, |
| 28360 | @code{20 dB @key{RET} l q} will return @code{100 mW}; | 28360 | @code{20 dB @key{RET} l q} will return @code{100 mW}; |
| 28361 | @code{20 dB @key{RET} 4 W @key{RET} O l q} will return @code{400 W}. | 28361 | @code{20 dB @key{RET} 4 W @key{RET} O l q} will return @code{400 W}. |
| 28362 | The @kbd{H l q} [@code{lufquant}] command behaves like @kbd{l q} but | 28362 | The @kbd{H l q} [@code{lufquant}] command behaves like @kbd{l q} but |
| @@ -28469,7 +28469,7 @@ The @kbd{l *} (@code{calc-lu-times}) [@code{lupmul}] and @kbd{H l *} | |||
| 28469 | [@code{lufmul}] commands will ``multiply'' a logarithmic unit by a | 28469 | [@code{lufmul}] commands will ``multiply'' a logarithmic unit by a |
| 28470 | number; the @kbd{l /} (@code{calc-lu-divide}) [@code{lupdiv}] and | 28470 | number; the @kbd{l /} (@code{calc-lu-divide}) [@code{lupdiv}] and |
| 28471 | @kbd{H l /} [@code{lufdiv}] commands will ``divide'' a logarithmic | 28471 | @kbd{H l /} [@code{lufdiv}] commands will ``divide'' a logarithmic |
| 28472 | unit by a number. Note that the reference quantities don't play a role | 28472 | unit by a number. Note that the reference quantities don't play a role |
| 28473 | in this arithmetic. | 28473 | in this arithmetic. |
| 28474 | 28474 | ||
| 28475 | @node Musical Notes | 28475 | @node Musical Notes |
| @@ -28528,7 +28528,7 @@ example, @code{500 Hz} gets converted to | |||
| 28528 | @tindex midi | 28528 | @tindex midi |
| 28529 | The @kbd{l m} (@code{calc-midi}) [@code{midi}] command converts either | 28529 | The @kbd{l m} (@code{calc-midi}) [@code{midi}] command converts either |
| 28530 | a frequency or a note given in scientific pitch notation to the | 28530 | a frequency or a note given in scientific pitch notation to the |
| 28531 | corresponding midi number. For example, @code{C_6} gets converted to 84 | 28531 | corresponding midi number. For example, @code{C_6} gets converted to 84 |
| 28532 | and @code{440 Hz} to 69. | 28532 | and @code{440 Hz} to 69. |
| 28533 | 28533 | ||
| 28534 | @kindex l f | 28534 | @kindex l f |
| @@ -28536,7 +28536,7 @@ and @code{440 Hz} to 69. | |||
| 28536 | @tindex freq | 28536 | @tindex freq |
| 28537 | The @kbd{l f} (@code{calc-freq}) [@code{freq}] command converts either | 28537 | The @kbd{l f} (@code{calc-freq}) [@code{freq}] command converts either |
| 28538 | either a midi number or a note given in scientific pitch notation to | 28538 | either a midi number or a note given in scientific pitch notation to |
| 28539 | the corresponding frequency. For example, @code{Asharp_2 + 30 cents} | 28539 | the corresponding frequency. For example, @code{Asharp_2 + 30 cents} |
| 28540 | gets converted to @code{118.578040134 Hz} and @code{55} to | 28540 | gets converted to @code{118.578040134 Hz} and @code{55} to |
| 28541 | @code{195.99771799 Hz}. | 28541 | @code{195.99771799 Hz}. |
| 28542 | 28542 | ||
| @@ -29530,7 +29530,7 @@ will be computed for the surface. | |||
| 29530 | 29530 | ||
| 29531 | Data values in the graph of a function are normally computed to a | 29531 | Data values in the graph of a function are normally computed to a |
| 29532 | precision of five digits, regardless of the current precision at the | 29532 | precision of five digits, regardless of the current precision at the |
| 29533 | time. This is usually more than adequate, but there are cases where | 29533 | time. This is usually more than adequate, but there are cases where |
| 29534 | it will not be. For example, plotting @expr{1 + x} with @expr{x} in the | 29534 | it will not be. For example, plotting @expr{1 + x} with @expr{x} in the |
| 29535 | interval @samp{[0 ..@: 1e-6]} will round all the data points down | 29535 | interval @samp{[0 ..@: 1e-6]} will round all the data points down |
| 29536 | to 1.0! Putting the command @samp{set precision @var{n}} in the | 29536 | to 1.0! Putting the command @samp{set precision @var{n}} in the |
| @@ -29975,7 +29975,7 @@ register will be deleted from the Calc buffer. | |||
| 29975 | It is possible to add additional stack entries to a register. The | 29975 | It is possible to add additional stack entries to a register. The |
| 29976 | command @kbd{M-x calc-append-to-register} will prompt for a register, | 29976 | command @kbd{M-x calc-append-to-register} will prompt for a register, |
| 29977 | then add the stack entries in the region to the end of the register | 29977 | then add the stack entries in the region to the end of the register |
| 29978 | contents. The command @kbd{M-x calc-prepend-to-register} will | 29978 | contents. The command @kbd{M-x calc-prepend-to-register} will |
| 29979 | similarly prompt for a register and add the stack entries in the | 29979 | similarly prompt for a register and add the stack entries in the |
| 29980 | region to the beginning of the register contents. Both commands take | 29980 | region to the beginning of the register contents. Both commands take |
| 29981 | @kbd{C-u} arguments, which will cause the region to be deleted after being | 29981 | @kbd{C-u} arguments, which will cause the region to be deleted after being |
| @@ -30620,7 +30620,7 @@ like most Calc commands, but rather in regular editing buffers that | |||
| 30620 | are visiting your own files. | 30620 | are visiting your own files. |
| 30621 | 30621 | ||
| 30622 | Calc will try to guess an appropriate language based on the major mode | 30622 | Calc will try to guess an appropriate language based on the major mode |
| 30623 | of the editing buffer. (@xref{Language Modes}.) If the current buffer is | 30623 | of the editing buffer. (@xref{Language Modes}.) If the current buffer is |
| 30624 | in @code{latex-mode}, for example, Calc will set its language to @LaTeX{}. | 30624 | in @code{latex-mode}, for example, Calc will set its language to @LaTeX{}. |
| 30625 | Similarly, Calc will use @TeX{} language for @code{tex-mode}, | 30625 | Similarly, Calc will use @TeX{} language for @code{tex-mode}, |
| 30626 | @code{plain-tex-mode} and @code{context-mode}, C language for | 30626 | @code{plain-tex-mode} and @code{context-mode}, C language for |
| @@ -30657,7 +30657,7 @@ on their own separate lines or in-line with the formula. | |||
| 30657 | If you give a positive or negative numeric prefix argument, Calc | 30657 | If you give a positive or negative numeric prefix argument, Calc |
| 30658 | instead uses the current point as one end of the formula, and includes | 30658 | instead uses the current point as one end of the formula, and includes |
| 30659 | that many lines forward or backward (respectively, including the current | 30659 | that many lines forward or backward (respectively, including the current |
| 30660 | line). Explicit delimiters are not necessary in this case. | 30660 | line). Explicit delimiters are not necessary in this case. |
| 30661 | 30661 | ||
| 30662 | With a prefix argument of zero, Calc uses the current region (delimited | 30662 | With a prefix argument of zero, Calc uses the current region (delimited |
| 30663 | by point and mark) instead of formula delimiters. With a prefix | 30663 | by point and mark) instead of formula delimiters. With a prefix |
| @@ -31189,7 +31189,7 @@ use @kbd{C-x * u} to update the buffer by hand. | |||
| 31189 | @noindent | 31189 | @noindent |
| 31190 | The mode settings can be changed while Calc is in embedded mode, but | 31190 | The mode settings can be changed while Calc is in embedded mode, but |
| 31191 | by default they will revert to their original values when embedded mode | 31191 | by default they will revert to their original values when embedded mode |
| 31192 | is ended. However, the modes saved when the mode-recording mode is | 31192 | is ended. However, the modes saved when the mode-recording mode is |
| 31193 | @code{Save} (see below) and the modes in effect when the @kbd{m e} | 31193 | @code{Save} (see below) and the modes in effect when the @kbd{m e} |
| 31194 | (@code{calc-embedded-preserve-modes}) command is given | 31194 | (@code{calc-embedded-preserve-modes}) command is given |
| 31195 | will be preserved when embedded mode is ended. | 31195 | will be preserved when embedded mode is ended. |
| @@ -31315,7 +31315,7 @@ on it in order to get it to notice the new annotation. | |||
| 31315 | 31315 | ||
| 31316 | Two more mode-recording modes selectable by @kbd{m R} are available | 31316 | Two more mode-recording modes selectable by @kbd{m R} are available |
| 31317 | which are also available outside of Embedded mode. | 31317 | which are also available outside of Embedded mode. |
| 31318 | (@pxref{General Mode Commands}.) They are @code{Save}, in which mode | 31318 | (@pxref{General Mode Commands}.) They are @code{Save}, in which mode |
| 31319 | settings are recorded permanently in your Calc init file (the file given | 31319 | settings are recorded permanently in your Calc init file (the file given |
| 31320 | by the variable @code{calc-settings-file}, typically @file{~/.emacs.d/calc.el}) | 31320 | by the variable @code{calc-settings-file}, typically @file{~/.emacs.d/calc.el}) |
| 31321 | rather than by annotating the current document, and no-recording | 31321 | rather than by annotating the current document, and no-recording |
| @@ -35645,7 +35645,7 @@ formulas in normal language modes. If | |||
| 35645 | @code{calc-multiplication-has-precedence} is non-@code{nil}, then | 35645 | @code{calc-multiplication-has-precedence} is non-@code{nil}, then |
| 35646 | multiplication has precedence (and, for certain obscure reasons, is | 35646 | multiplication has precedence (and, for certain obscure reasons, is |
| 35647 | right associative), and so for example @samp{a/b*c} will be interpreted | 35647 | right associative), and so for example @samp{a/b*c} will be interpreted |
| 35648 | as @samp{a/(b*c)}. If @code{calc-multiplication-has-precedence} is | 35648 | as @samp{a/(b*c)}. If @code{calc-multiplication-has-precedence} is |
| 35649 | @code{nil}, then multiplication has the same precedence as division | 35649 | @code{nil}, then multiplication has the same precedence as division |
| 35650 | (and, like division, is left associative), and so for example | 35650 | (and, like division, is left associative), and so for example |
| 35651 | @samp{a/b*c} will be interpreted as @samp{(a/b)*c}. The default value | 35651 | @samp{a/b*c} will be interpreted as @samp{(a/b)*c}. The default value |
diff --git a/doc/misc/cc-mode.texi b/doc/misc/cc-mode.texi index ced59c0eee6..c0819b232a4 100644 --- a/doc/misc/cc-mode.texi +++ b/doc/misc/cc-mode.texi | |||
| @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ modify this GNU manual.'' | |||
| 182 | @end quotation | 182 | @end quotation |
| 183 | @end copying | 183 | @end copying |
| 184 | 184 | ||
| 185 | @comment Info directory entry for use by install-info. The indentation | 185 | @comment Info directory entry for use by install-info. The indentation |
| 186 | @comment here is by request from the FSF folks. | 186 | @comment here is by request from the FSF folks. |
| 187 | @dircategory Emacs editing modes | 187 | @dircategory Emacs editing modes |
| 188 | @direntry | 188 | @direntry |
| @@ -1429,7 +1429,7 @@ continuation of the preceding @code{if}. | |||
| 1429 | @findex abbrev-mode | 1429 | @findex abbrev-mode |
| 1430 | @cindex Abbrev mode | 1430 | @cindex Abbrev mode |
| 1431 | @ccmode{} uses Abbrev mode (@pxref{Abbrevs,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}) | 1431 | @ccmode{} uses Abbrev mode (@pxref{Abbrevs,,,@emacsman{}, @emacsmantitle{}}) |
| 1432 | to accomplish this. It's therefore turned on by default in all language | 1432 | to accomplish this. It's therefore turned on by default in all language |
| 1433 | modes except IDL mode, since CORBA IDL doesn't have any statements. | 1433 | modes except IDL mode, since CORBA IDL doesn't have any statements. |
| 1434 | @end deffn | 1434 | @end deffn |
| 1435 | 1435 | ||
| @@ -2704,7 +2704,7 @@ for C code in GNU programs. | |||
| 2704 | 2704 | ||
| 2705 | @item k&r | 2705 | @item k&r |
| 2706 | @cindex K&R style | 2706 | @cindex K&R style |
| 2707 | The classic Kernighan and Ritchie style for C code. If you're looking | 2707 | The classic Kernighan and Ritchie style for C code. If you're looking |
| 2708 | for the style used in the 2nd edition of their book ``The C | 2708 | for the style used in the 2nd edition of their book ``The C |
| 2709 | Programming Language'', then check out the @code{stroustrup} style. | 2709 | Programming Language'', then check out the @code{stroustrup} style. |
| 2710 | 2710 | ||
| @@ -7591,7 +7591,7 @@ Started}. | |||
| 7591 | @kindex C-M-\ | 7591 | @kindex C-M-\ |
| 7592 | @emph{How do I reindent the whole file?} | 7592 | @emph{How do I reindent the whole file?} |
| 7593 | 7593 | ||
| 7594 | Visit the file and hit @kbd{C-x h} to mark the whole buffer. Then hit | 7594 | Visit the file and hit @kbd{C-x h} to mark the whole buffer. Then hit |
| 7595 | @kbd{C-M-\}. @xref{Indentation Commands}. | 7595 | @kbd{C-M-\}. @xref{Indentation Commands}. |
| 7596 | 7596 | ||
| 7597 | @item | 7597 | @item |
diff --git a/doc/misc/cl.texi b/doc/misc/cl.texi index c3a91f7dab1..113029700ec 100644 --- a/doc/misc/cl.texi +++ b/doc/misc/cl.texi | |||
| @@ -860,7 +860,7 @@ Thus @code{(cl-typep @var{object} 'null)} is equivalent to | |||
| 860 | 860 | ||
| 861 | @item | 861 | @item |
| 862 | The type symbol @code{atom} represents all objects that are not cons | 862 | The type symbol @code{atom} represents all objects that are not cons |
| 863 | cells. Thus @code{(cl-typep @var{object} 'atom)} is equivalent to | 863 | cells. Thus @code{(cl-typep @var{object} 'atom)} is equivalent to |
| 864 | @code{(atom @var{object})}. | 864 | @code{(atom @var{object})}. |
| 865 | 865 | ||
| 866 | @item | 866 | @item |
| @@ -2191,7 +2191,7 @@ term restricts the search to just the specified property. The | |||
| 2191 | Properties,,,elisp}. | 2191 | Properties,,,elisp}. |
| 2192 | 2192 | ||
| 2193 | @item for @var{var} being the frames | 2193 | @item for @var{var} being the frames |
| 2194 | This clause iterates over all Emacs frames. The clause @code{screens} is | 2194 | This clause iterates over all Emacs frames. The clause @code{screens} is |
| 2195 | a synonym for @code{frames}. The frames are visited in | 2195 | a synonym for @code{frames}. The frames are visited in |
| 2196 | @code{next-frame} order starting from @code{selected-frame}. | 2196 | @code{next-frame} order starting from @code{selected-frame}. |
| 2197 | 2197 | ||
diff --git a/doc/misc/dbus.texi b/doc/misc/dbus.texi index 104cde01227..b81c862c80f 100644 --- a/doc/misc/dbus.texi +++ b/doc/misc/dbus.texi | |||
| @@ -1259,7 +1259,7 @@ object. Example: | |||
| 1259 | @end lisp | 1259 | @end lisp |
| 1260 | 1260 | ||
| 1261 | With the @code{dbus-introspect} function it is possible to explore the | 1261 | With the @code{dbus-introspect} function it is possible to explore the |
| 1262 | interfaces of @samp{org.freedesktop.Hal} service. It offers the | 1262 | interfaces of @samp{org.freedesktop.Hal} service. It offers the |
| 1263 | interfaces @samp{org.freedesktop.Hal.Manager} for the object at the | 1263 | interfaces @samp{org.freedesktop.Hal.Manager} for the object at the |
| 1264 | path @samp{/org/freedesktop/Hal/Manager} as well as the interface | 1264 | path @samp{/org/freedesktop/Hal/Manager} as well as the interface |
| 1265 | @samp{org.freedesktop.Hal.Device} for all objects prefixed with the | 1265 | @samp{org.freedesktop.Hal.Device} for all objects prefixed with the |
| @@ -1978,7 +1978,7 @@ If this variable is non-@code{nil}, D-Bus specific debug messages are raised. | |||
| 1978 | Input parameters of @code{dbus-call-method}, | 1978 | Input parameters of @code{dbus-call-method}, |
| 1979 | @code{dbus-call-method-asynchronously}, @code{dbus-send-signal}, | 1979 | @code{dbus-call-method-asynchronously}, @code{dbus-send-signal}, |
| 1980 | @code{dbus-register-method}, @code{dbus-register-property} and | 1980 | @code{dbus-register-method}, @code{dbus-register-property} and |
| 1981 | @code{dbus-register-signal} are checked for correct D-Bus types. If | 1981 | @code{dbus-register-signal} are checked for correct D-Bus types. If |
| 1982 | there is a type mismatch, the Lisp error @code{wrong-type-argument} | 1982 | there is a type mismatch, the Lisp error @code{wrong-type-argument} |
| 1983 | @code{D-Bus @var{arg}} is raised. | 1983 | @code{D-Bus @var{arg}} is raised. |
| 1984 | 1984 | ||
diff --git a/doc/misc/ebrowse.texi b/doc/misc/ebrowse.texi index dca6266d8ae..27a5deb86d9 100644 --- a/doc/misc/ebrowse.texi +++ b/doc/misc/ebrowse.texi | |||
| @@ -513,8 +513,8 @@ practical than to clutter up the buffer list with dozens of member | |||
| 513 | buffers. | 513 | buffers. |
| 514 | 514 | ||
| 515 | If you want to display more than one member list at a time you can | 515 | If you want to display more than one member list at a time you can |
| 516 | @dfn{freeze} its member buffer. Freezing a member buffer prevents it | 516 | @dfn{freeze} its member buffer. Freezing a member buffer prevents it |
| 517 | from being overwritten the next time you display a member list. You can | 517 | from being overwritten the next time you display a member list. You can |
| 518 | toggle this buffer status at any time. | 518 | toggle this buffer status at any time. |
| 519 | 519 | ||
| 520 | Every member list display command in the tree buffer can be used with a | 520 | Every member list display command in the tree buffer can be used with a |
| @@ -747,7 +747,7 @@ menu. | |||
| 747 | @cindex unmark all | 747 | @cindex unmark all |
| 748 | @item M a | 748 | @item M a |
| 749 | Unmark all classes. With prefix argument @kbd{C-u}, mark all classes in | 749 | Unmark all classes. With prefix argument @kbd{C-u}, mark all classes in |
| 750 | the tree. Since this command operates on the whole buffer, it can also be | 750 | the tree. Since this command operates on the whole buffer, it can also be |
| 751 | found in the buffer's object menu. | 751 | found in the buffer's object menu. |
| 752 | @end table | 752 | @end table |
| 753 | 753 | ||
diff --git a/doc/misc/ede.texi b/doc/misc/ede.texi index ae179832753..4ed3fc9d1df 100644 --- a/doc/misc/ede.texi +++ b/doc/misc/ede.texi | |||
| @@ -1120,7 +1120,7 @@ number. It also holds a list of @code{ede-target} objects and a list | |||
| 1120 | of sub projects, or more @code{ede-project} objects. | 1120 | of sub projects, or more @code{ede-project} objects. |
| 1121 | 1121 | ||
| 1122 | New project types must subclass @code{ede-project} to add special | 1122 | New project types must subclass @code{ede-project} to add special |
| 1123 | behavior. New project types also need to subclass @code{ede-target} to | 1123 | behavior. New project types also need to subclass @code{ede-target} to |
| 1124 | add specialty behavior. | 1124 | add specialty behavior. |
| 1125 | 1125 | ||
| 1126 | In this way, the common @ede{} interface is designed to work against | 1126 | In this way, the common @ede{} interface is designed to work against |
diff --git a/doc/misc/ediff.texi b/doc/misc/ediff.texi index 749025c870b..ae107323d9c 100644 --- a/doc/misc/ediff.texi +++ b/doc/misc/ediff.texi | |||
| @@ -135,10 +135,10 @@ The architecture and the interface are, of course, drastically different. | |||
| 135 | 135 | ||
| 136 | When Ediff starts up, it displays a small control window, which accepts the | 136 | When Ediff starts up, it displays a small control window, which accepts the |
| 137 | Ediff commands, and two or three windows displaying the files to be compared | 137 | Ediff commands, and two or three windows displaying the files to be compared |
| 138 | or merged. The control window can be in its own small frame or it can be | 138 | or merged. The control window can be in its own small frame or it can be |
| 139 | part of a bigger frame that displays other buffers. In any case, it is | 139 | part of a bigger frame that displays other buffers. In any case, it is |
| 140 | important that the control window be active (i.e., be the one receiving the | 140 | important that the control window be active (i.e., be the one receiving the |
| 141 | keystrokes) when you use Ediff. You can switch to other Emacs buffers at | 141 | keystrokes) when you use Ediff. You can switch to other Emacs buffers at |
| 142 | will and even edit the files currently being compared with Ediff and then | 142 | will and even edit the files currently being compared with Ediff and then |
| 143 | switch back to Ediff at any time by activating the appropriate Emacs windows. | 143 | switch back to Ediff at any time by activating the appropriate Emacs windows. |
| 144 | 144 | ||
| @@ -156,13 +156,13 @@ Compare two files. | |||
| 156 | 156 | ||
| 157 | @item ediff-backup | 157 | @item ediff-backup |
| 158 | @findex ediff-backup | 158 | @findex ediff-backup |
| 159 | Compare a file with its backup. If there are several numerical backups, use | 159 | Compare a file with its backup. If there are several numerical backups, use |
| 160 | the latest. If the file is itself a backup, then compare it with its | 160 | the latest. If the file is itself a backup, then compare it with its |
| 161 | original. | 161 | original. |
| 162 | 162 | ||
| 163 | @item ediff-current-file | 163 | @item ediff-current-file |
| 164 | @findex ediff-current-file | 164 | @findex ediff-current-file |
| 165 | Compare the buffer with its file on disk. This function can be used as a | 165 | Compare the buffer with its file on disk. This function can be used as a |
| 166 | safe version of @code{revert-buffer}. | 166 | safe version of @code{revert-buffer}. |
| 167 | 167 | ||
| 168 | @item ediff-buffers | 168 | @item ediff-buffers |
| @@ -220,14 +220,14 @@ Compare text visible in 2 windows line-by-line. | |||
| 220 | @findex ediff-regions-wordwise | 220 | @findex ediff-regions-wordwise |
| 221 | Compare regions word-by-word. The regions can come from the same buffer | 221 | Compare regions word-by-word. The regions can come from the same buffer |
| 222 | and they can even overlap. You will be asked to specify the buffers that | 222 | and they can even overlap. You will be asked to specify the buffers that |
| 223 | contain the regions, which you want to compare. For each buffer, you will | 223 | contain the regions, which you want to compare. For each buffer, you will |
| 224 | also be asked to mark the regions to be compared. Pay attention to the | 224 | also be asked to mark the regions to be compared. Pay attention to the |
| 225 | messages that appear in the minibuffer. | 225 | messages that appear in the minibuffer. |
| 226 | 226 | ||
| 227 | @item ediff-regions-linewise | 227 | @item ediff-regions-linewise |
| 228 | @findex ediff-regions-linewise | 228 | @findex ediff-regions-linewise |
| 229 | Similar to @code{ediff-windows-linewise}, but compares the regions | 229 | Similar to @code{ediff-windows-linewise}, but compares the regions |
| 230 | line-by-line. See @code{ediff-windows-linewise} for more details. | 230 | line-by-line. See @code{ediff-windows-linewise} for more details. |
| 231 | 231 | ||
| 232 | @item ediff-revision | 232 | @item ediff-revision |
| 233 | @findex ediff-revision | 233 | @findex ediff-revision |
| @@ -246,7 +246,7 @@ will be able to patch the files selectively. @xref{Session Groups}, for | |||
| 246 | more details. | 246 | more details. |
| 247 | 247 | ||
| 248 | Since the patch might be in a buffer or a file, you will be asked which is | 248 | Since the patch might be in a buffer or a file, you will be asked which is |
| 249 | the case. To avoid this extra prompt, you can invoke this command with a | 249 | the case. To avoid this extra prompt, you can invoke this command with a |
| 250 | prefix argument. With an odd prefix argument, Ediff assumes the patch | 250 | prefix argument. With an odd prefix argument, Ediff assumes the patch |
| 251 | is in a file; with an even argument, a buffer is assumed. | 251 | is in a file; with an even argument, a buffer is assumed. |
| 252 | 252 | ||
| @@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ This function would refuse to apply a multifile patch to a buffer. Use | |||
| 280 | modified by the @code{patch} utility). | 280 | modified by the @code{patch} utility). |
| 281 | 281 | ||
| 282 | Since the patch might be in a buffer or a file, you will be asked which is | 282 | Since the patch might be in a buffer or a file, you will be asked which is |
| 283 | the case. To avoid this extra prompt, you can invoke this command with a | 283 | the case. To avoid this extra prompt, you can invoke this command with a |
| 284 | prefix argument. With an odd prefix argument, Ediff assumes the patch | 284 | prefix argument. With an odd prefix argument, Ediff assumes the patch |
| 285 | is in a file; with an even argument, a buffer is assumed. | 285 | is in a file; with an even argument, a buffer is assumed. |
| 286 | 286 | ||
| @@ -683,7 +683,7 @@ again puts Ediff back in the original state. | |||
| 683 | @vindex ediff-ignore-case-option | 683 | @vindex ediff-ignore-case-option |
| 684 | @vindex ediff-ignore-case-option3 | 684 | @vindex ediff-ignore-case-option3 |
| 685 | @vindex ediff-ignore-case | 685 | @vindex ediff-ignore-case |
| 686 | Toggle case sensitivity in the diff program. All diffs are recomputed. | 686 | Toggle case sensitivity in the diff program. All diffs are recomputed. |
| 687 | Case sensitivity is controlled by the variables | 687 | Case sensitivity is controlled by the variables |
| 688 | @code{ediff-ignore-case-option}, @code{ediff-ignore-case-option3}, | 688 | @code{ediff-ignore-case-option}, @code{ediff-ignore-case-option3}, |
| 689 | and @code{ediff-ignore-case}, which are explained elsewhere. | 689 | and @code{ediff-ignore-case}, which are explained elsewhere. |
| @@ -814,7 +814,7 @@ it. Typing @kbd{$$} again undoes this setting. | |||
| 814 | @kindex $* | 814 | @kindex $* |
| 815 | When merging files with large number of differences, it is sometimes | 815 | When merging files with large number of differences, it is sometimes |
| 816 | convenient to be able to skip the difference regions for which you already | 816 | convenient to be able to skip the difference regions for which you already |
| 817 | decided which variant is most appropriate. Typing @kbd{$*} will accomplish | 817 | decided which variant is most appropriate. Typing @kbd{$*} will accomplish |
| 818 | precisely this. | 818 | precisely this. |
| 819 | 819 | ||
| 820 | To be more precise, this toggles the check for whether the current merge is | 820 | To be more precise, this toggles the check for whether the current merge is |
| @@ -898,9 +898,9 @@ child Ediff session for comparing regions in buffers A, B, or | |||
| 898 | C as follows. | 898 | C as follows. |
| 899 | 899 | ||
| 900 | First, you will be asked whether you want to compare the fine differences | 900 | First, you will be asked whether you want to compare the fine differences |
| 901 | between the currently highlighted buffers on a word-by-word basis. If you | 901 | between the currently highlighted buffers on a word-by-word basis. If you |
| 902 | accept, a child Ediff session will start using the currently highlighted | 902 | accept, a child Ediff session will start using the currently highlighted |
| 903 | regions. Ediff will let you step over the differences word-wise. | 903 | regions. Ediff will let you step over the differences word-wise. |
| 904 | 904 | ||
| 905 | If you reject the offer, you will be asked to select regions of your choice. | 905 | If you reject the offer, you will be asked to select regions of your choice. |
| 906 | 906 | ||
| @@ -1054,9 +1054,9 @@ directories. | |||
| 1054 | 1054 | ||
| 1055 | @cindex Directory difference buffer | 1055 | @cindex Directory difference buffer |
| 1056 | Sometimes it is desirable to copy some files from one directory to another | 1056 | Sometimes it is desirable to copy some files from one directory to another |
| 1057 | without exiting Ediff. The @emph{directory difference buffer}, which is | 1057 | without exiting Ediff. The @emph{directory difference buffer}, which is |
| 1058 | displayed by typing @kbd{D} as discussed above, can be used for this | 1058 | displayed by typing @kbd{D} as discussed above, can be used for this |
| 1059 | purpose. If a file is, say, in Ediff's Directory A, but is missing in | 1059 | purpose. If a file is, say, in Ediff's Directory A, but is missing in |
| 1060 | Ediff's Directory B (Ediff will refuse to override existing files), then | 1060 | Ediff's Directory B (Ediff will refuse to override existing files), then |
| 1061 | typing @kbd{C} or clicking mouse button 2 over that file (which must be | 1061 | typing @kbd{C} or clicking mouse button 2 over that file (which must be |
| 1062 | displayed in directory difference buffer) will copy that file from | 1062 | displayed in directory difference buffer) will copy that file from |
| @@ -1130,7 +1130,7 @@ for hiding or, with @kbd{=m}, for further operations. | |||
| 1130 | 1130 | ||
| 1131 | The comparison operations @kbd{==}, @kbd{=h}, and @kbd{=m} can recurse into | 1131 | The comparison operations @kbd{==}, @kbd{=h}, and @kbd{=m} can recurse into |
| 1132 | subdirectories to see if they have identical contents (so the user will not | 1132 | subdirectories to see if they have identical contents (so the user will not |
| 1133 | need to descend into those subdirectories manually). These commands ask the | 1133 | need to descend into those subdirectories manually). These commands ask the |
| 1134 | user whether or not to do a recursive descent. | 1134 | user whether or not to do a recursive descent. |
| 1135 | 1135 | ||
| 1136 | 1136 | ||
| @@ -1221,7 +1221,7 @@ of Ediff. | |||
| 1221 | @vindex ediff-after-setup-windows-hook | 1221 | @vindex ediff-after-setup-windows-hook |
| 1222 | These two hooks are called before and after Ediff sets up its window | 1222 | These two hooks are called before and after Ediff sets up its window |
| 1223 | configuration. These hooks are run each time Ediff rearranges windows to | 1223 | configuration. These hooks are run each time Ediff rearranges windows to |
| 1224 | its liking. This happens whenever it detects that the user changed the | 1224 | its liking. This happens whenever it detects that the user changed the |
| 1225 | windows setup. | 1225 | windows setup. |
| 1226 | 1226 | ||
| 1227 | @item ediff-suspend-hook | 1227 | @item ediff-suspend-hook |
| @@ -1323,7 +1323,7 @@ Hooks run after setting up the registry for all active Ediff session. | |||
| 1323 | @item ediff-before-session-group-setup-hook | 1323 | @item ediff-before-session-group-setup-hook |
| 1324 | @vindex ediff-before-session-group-setup-hook | 1324 | @vindex ediff-before-session-group-setup-hook |
| 1325 | Hooks run before setting up a control panel for a group of related Ediff | 1325 | Hooks run before setting up a control panel for a group of related Ediff |
| 1326 | sessions. Can be used, for example, to save window configuration to restore | 1326 | sessions. Can be used, for example, to save window configuration to restore |
| 1327 | later. | 1327 | later. |
| 1328 | @item ediff-after-session-group-setup-hook | 1328 | @item ediff-after-session-group-setup-hook |
| 1329 | @vindex ediff-after-session-group-setup-hook | 1329 | @vindex ediff-after-session-group-setup-hook |
| @@ -1598,21 +1598,21 @@ problem. | |||
| 1598 | @vindex ediff-ignore-case-option | 1598 | @vindex ediff-ignore-case-option |
| 1599 | @vindex ediff-ignore-case-option3 | 1599 | @vindex ediff-ignore-case-option3 |
| 1600 | @vindex ediff-ignore-case | 1600 | @vindex ediff-ignore-case |
| 1601 | Finally, Ediff can be told to ignore the case of the letters. This behavior | 1601 | Finally, Ediff can be told to ignore the case of the letters. This behavior |
| 1602 | can be toggled with @kbd{#c} and it is controlled with three variables: | 1602 | can be toggled with @kbd{#c} and it is controlled with three variables: |
| 1603 | @code{ediff-ignore-case-option}, @code{ediff-ignore-case-option3}, and | 1603 | @code{ediff-ignore-case-option}, @code{ediff-ignore-case-option3}, and |
| 1604 | @code{ediff-ignore-case}. | 1604 | @code{ediff-ignore-case}. |
| 1605 | 1605 | ||
| 1606 | The variable @code{ediff-ignore-case-option} specifies the option to pass | 1606 | The variable @code{ediff-ignore-case-option} specifies the option to pass |
| 1607 | to the diff program for comparing two files or buffers. For GNU | 1607 | to the diff program for comparing two files or buffers. For GNU |
| 1608 | @code{diff}, this option is @code{"-i"}. The variable | 1608 | @code{diff}, this option is @code{"-i"}. The variable |
| 1609 | @code{ediff-ignore-case-option3} specifies the option to pass to the | 1609 | @code{ediff-ignore-case-option3} specifies the option to pass to the |
| 1610 | @code{diff3} program in order to make it case-insensitive. GNU @code{diff3} | 1610 | @code{diff3} program in order to make it case-insensitive. GNU @code{diff3} |
| 1611 | does not have such an option, so when merging or comparing three files with | 1611 | does not have such an option, so when merging or comparing three files with |
| 1612 | this program, ignoring the letter case is not supported. | 1612 | this program, ignoring the letter case is not supported. |
| 1613 | 1613 | ||
| 1614 | The variable @code{ediff-ignore-case} controls whether Ediff starts out by | 1614 | The variable @code{ediff-ignore-case} controls whether Ediff starts out by |
| 1615 | ignoring letter case or not. It can be set in @file{.emacs} using | 1615 | ignoring letter case or not. It can be set in @file{.emacs} using |
| 1616 | @code{setq-default}. | 1616 | @code{setq-default}. |
| 1617 | 1617 | ||
| 1618 | When case sensitivity is toggled, all difference | 1618 | When case sensitivity is toggled, all difference |
| @@ -1875,11 +1875,11 @@ Customize interface instead of using @code{setq} directly.) | |||
| 1875 | @item ediff-coding-system-for-read | 1875 | @item ediff-coding-system-for-read |
| 1876 | @vindex ediff-coding-system-for-read | 1876 | @vindex ediff-coding-system-for-read |
| 1877 | This variable specifies the coding system to use when reading the output | 1877 | This variable specifies the coding system to use when reading the output |
| 1878 | that the programs @code{diff3} and @code{diff} send to Emacs. The default | 1878 | that the programs @code{diff3} and @code{diff} send to Emacs. The default |
| 1879 | is @code{raw-text}, and this should work fine in Unix and in most | 1879 | is @code{raw-text}, and this should work fine in Unix and in most |
| 1880 | cases under Windows NT/98/2000. There are @code{diff} programs | 1880 | cases under Windows NT/98/2000. There are @code{diff} programs |
| 1881 | for which the default option doesn't work under Windows. In such cases, | 1881 | for which the default option doesn't work under Windows. In such cases, |
| 1882 | @code{raw-text-dos} might work. If not, you will have to experiment with | 1882 | @code{raw-text-dos} might work. If not, you will have to experiment with |
| 1883 | other coding systems or use GNU diff. | 1883 | other coding systems or use GNU diff. |
| 1884 | 1884 | ||
| 1885 | @item ediff-patch-program | 1885 | @item ediff-patch-program |
| @@ -1992,7 +1992,7 @@ the difference region from the ancestor buffer, if available | |||
| 1992 | ======= end | 1992 | ======= end |
| 1993 | @end example | 1993 | @end example |
| 1994 | 1994 | ||
| 1995 | The above is the default template for the combined region. The user can | 1995 | The above is the default template for the combined region. The user can |
| 1996 | customize this template using the variable | 1996 | customize this template using the variable |
| 1997 | @code{ediff-combination-pattern}. | 1997 | @code{ediff-combination-pattern}. |
| 1998 | 1998 | ||
| @@ -2000,11 +2000,11 @@ customize this template using the variable | |||
| 2000 | The variable @code{ediff-combination-pattern} specifies the template that | 2000 | The variable @code{ediff-combination-pattern} specifies the template that |
| 2001 | determines how the combined merged region looks like. The template is | 2001 | determines how the combined merged region looks like. The template is |
| 2002 | represented as a list of the form @code{(STRING1 Symbol1 STRING2 Symbol2 | 2002 | represented as a list of the form @code{(STRING1 Symbol1 STRING2 Symbol2 |
| 2003 | STRING3 Symbol3 STRING4)}. The symbols here must be atoms of the form | 2003 | STRING3 Symbol3 STRING4)}. The symbols here must be atoms of the form |
| 2004 | @code{A}, @code{B}, or @code{Ancestor}. They determine the order in which | 2004 | @code{A}, @code{B}, or @code{Ancestor}. They determine the order in which |
| 2005 | the corresponding difference regions (from buffers A, B, and the ancestor | 2005 | the corresponding difference regions (from buffers A, B, and the ancestor |
| 2006 | buffer) are displayed in the merged region of buffer C@. The strings in the | 2006 | buffer) are displayed in the merged region of buffer C@. The strings in the |
| 2007 | template determine the text that separates the aforesaid regions. The | 2007 | template determine the text that separates the aforesaid regions. The |
| 2008 | default template is | 2008 | default template is |
| 2009 | 2009 | ||
| 2010 | @smallexample | 2010 | @smallexample |
| @@ -2014,8 +2014,8 @@ default template is | |||
| 2014 | 2014 | ||
| 2015 | @noindent | 2015 | @noindent |
| 2016 | (this is one long line) and the corresponding combined region is shown | 2016 | (this is one long line) and the corresponding combined region is shown |
| 2017 | above. The order in which the regions are shown (and the separator | 2017 | above. The order in which the regions are shown (and the separator |
| 2018 | strings) can be changed by changing the above template. It is even | 2018 | strings) can be changed by changing the above template. It is even |
| 2019 | possible to add or delete region specifiers in this template (although | 2019 | possible to add or delete region specifiers in this template (although |
| 2020 | the only possibly useful such modification seems to be the deletion of | 2020 | the only possibly useful such modification seems to be the deletion of |
| 2021 | the ancestor). | 2021 | the ancestor). |
| @@ -2154,7 +2154,7 @@ change this variable. | |||
| 2154 | @vindex ediff-merge-filename-prefix | 2154 | @vindex ediff-merge-filename-prefix |
| 2155 | When merge buffers are saved automatically as directed by | 2155 | When merge buffers are saved automatically as directed by |
| 2156 | @code{ediff-autostore-merges}, Ediff attaches a prefix to each file, as | 2156 | @code{ediff-autostore-merges}, Ediff attaches a prefix to each file, as |
| 2157 | specified by the variable @code{ediff-merge-filename-prefix}. The default | 2157 | specified by the variable @code{ediff-merge-filename-prefix}. The default |
| 2158 | is @code{merge_}, but this can be changed by the user. | 2158 | is @code{merge_}, but this can be changed by the user. |
| 2159 | 2159 | ||
| 2160 | @node Support for Version Control | 2160 | @node Support for Version Control |
| @@ -2318,9 +2318,9 @@ unconditionally (e.g., by making @code{ediff-janitor} into one of these hooks). | |||
| 2318 | 2318 | ||
| 2319 | @item ediff-keep-tmp-versions | 2319 | @item ediff-keep-tmp-versions |
| 2320 | @vindex ediff-keep-tmp-versions | 2320 | @vindex ediff-keep-tmp-versions |
| 2321 | Default is @code{nil}. If @code{t}, the versions of the files being | 2321 | Default is @code{nil}. If @code{t}, the versions of the files being |
| 2322 | compared or merged using operations such as @code{ediff-revision} or | 2322 | compared or merged using operations such as @code{ediff-revision} or |
| 2323 | @code{ediff-merge-revisions} are not deleted on exit. The normal action is | 2323 | @code{ediff-merge-revisions} are not deleted on exit. The normal action is |
| 2324 | to clean up and delete these version files. | 2324 | to clean up and delete these version files. |
| 2325 | 2325 | ||
| 2326 | @item ediff-grab-mouse | 2326 | @item ediff-grab-mouse |
diff --git a/doc/misc/efaq-w32.texi b/doc/misc/efaq-w32.texi index c5ba6c8609f..411450cdc42 100644 --- a/doc/misc/efaq-w32.texi +++ b/doc/misc/efaq-w32.texi | |||
| @@ -773,7 +773,7 @@ corrupted while unpacking and Emacs will not start. | |||
| 773 | 773 | ||
| 774 | If it is still not working, send mail to the | 774 | If it is still not working, send mail to the |
| 775 | @email{help-gnu-emacs@@gnu.org} mailing list, describing what you've | 775 | @email{help-gnu-emacs@@gnu.org} mailing list, describing what you've |
| 776 | done, and what you are seeing. (The more information you send the more | 776 | done, and what you are seeing. (The more information you send the more |
| 777 | likely it is that you'll receive a helpful response.) | 777 | likely it is that you'll receive a helpful response.) |
| 778 | 778 | ||
| 779 | @node Virus | 779 | @node Virus |
| @@ -1592,7 +1592,7 @@ smtpmail is loaded, then you'll need to change | |||
| 1592 | @code{smtpmail-smtp-server}. | 1592 | @code{smtpmail-smtp-server}. |
| 1593 | 1593 | ||
| 1594 | If you are experiencing problems with sending large messages, check | 1594 | If you are experiencing problems with sending large messages, check |
| 1595 | the value of the variable @code{smtpmail-debug-info}. If it is | 1595 | the value of the variable @code{smtpmail-debug-info}. If it is |
| 1596 | non-@code{nil}, you should set it to @code{nil}: | 1596 | non-@code{nil}, you should set it to @code{nil}: |
| 1597 | 1597 | ||
| 1598 | @node Incoming mail with Rmail | 1598 | @node Incoming mail with Rmail |
| @@ -1908,9 +1908,9 @@ See the following two URLs for details: | |||
| 1908 | @cindex MSVC++, compiling within Emacs | 1908 | @cindex MSVC++, compiling within Emacs |
| 1909 | @findex compile | 1909 | @findex compile |
| 1910 | 1910 | ||
| 1911 | This is an app note on how to use Microsoft Visual C++ with Emacs. The | 1911 | This is an app note on how to use Microsoft Visual C++ with Emacs. The |
| 1912 | experiments done below were done with Emacs 19.34.1 on Windows 95, | 1912 | experiments done below were done with Emacs 19.34.1 on Windows 95, |
| 1913 | using Visual C++ 4.0 Standard Edition. Your mileage may vary. | 1913 | using Visual C++ 4.0 Standard Edition. Your mileage may vary. |
| 1914 | 1914 | ||
| 1915 | This writeup assumes minimal knowledge of Emacs hacking on the part of | 1915 | This writeup assumes minimal knowledge of Emacs hacking on the part of |
| 1916 | the reader. | 1916 | the reader. |
| @@ -1939,14 +1939,14 @@ For all versions of Windows you can alternatively set the variables | |||
| 1939 | just inside Emacs by using @code{setenv} calls in your init file. | 1939 | just inside Emacs by using @code{setenv} calls in your init file. |
| 1940 | @xref{Installing Emacs,,Where do I put my init file?}. | 1940 | @xref{Installing Emacs,,Where do I put my init file?}. |
| 1941 | 1941 | ||
| 1942 | You should now be able to compile from Emacs. Load a source file from | 1942 | You should now be able to compile from Emacs. Load a source file from |
| 1943 | a VC++ project. Type @kbd{M-x compile}. Replace the proposed command line | 1943 | a VC++ project. Type @kbd{M-x compile}. Replace the proposed command line |
| 1944 | with: | 1944 | with: |
| 1945 | @example | 1945 | @example |
| 1946 | nmake -f @var{ProjectName}.mak | 1946 | nmake -f @var{ProjectName}.mak |
| 1947 | @end example | 1947 | @end example |
| 1948 | 1948 | ||
| 1949 | You will find that this defaults to a debug build. You can change it | 1949 | You will find that this defaults to a debug build. You can change it |
| 1950 | to a release build with: | 1950 | to a release build with: |
| 1951 | @example | 1951 | @example |
| 1952 | nmake -f @var{ProjectName}.mak CFG="@var{ProjectName} - Win32 Release" | 1952 | nmake -f @var{ProjectName}.mak CFG="@var{ProjectName} - Win32 Release" |
| @@ -2018,21 +2018,21 @@ click on @code{Customize...}. In the @code{Tools} tab, click on | |||
| 2018 | @file{emacsclientw.exe} file in your Emacs bin directory, and | 2018 | @file{emacsclientw.exe} file in your Emacs bin directory, and |
| 2019 | select it. For arguments, use @option{+$(CurLine)} | 2019 | select it. For arguments, use @option{+$(CurLine)} |
| 2020 | @option{"$(FilePath)"} and for the directory use the @code{$(WkspDir)} | 2020 | @option{"$(FilePath)"} and for the directory use the @code{$(WkspDir)} |
| 2021 | (the quotes around FilePath handle paths with spaces in them). Set the | 2021 | (the quotes around FilePath handle paths with spaces in them). Set the |
| 2022 | Menu Text to say "Em&acs". The @option{+$(CurLine)} will set point in | 2022 | Menu Text to say "Em&acs". The @option{+$(CurLine)} will set point in |
| 2023 | Emacs to the same line as the cursor position in VC++. The ampersand | 2023 | Emacs to the same line as the cursor position in VC++. The ampersand |
| 2024 | in the word @code{Em&acs} allows you to select emacs from the keyboard. | 2024 | in the word @code{Em&acs} allows you to select emacs from the keyboard. |
| 2025 | (E is already used for the OLE control test container.) | 2025 | (E is already used for the OLE control test container.) |
| 2026 | 2026 | ||
| 2027 | You should now be able to go to any source file in your project. Then, | 2027 | You should now be able to go to any source file in your project. Then, |
| 2028 | use the pull-down menu @code{Tools->Emacs}. The active file in your | 2028 | use the pull-down menu @code{Tools->Emacs}. The active file in your |
| 2029 | VC++ IDE should now be front and center in Emacs, all ready to edit as | 2029 | VC++ IDE should now be front and center in Emacs, all ready to edit as |
| 2030 | you wish. If you use keystrokes to work the menus, try @kbd{Alt-T A} to | 2030 | you wish. If you use keystrokes to work the menus, try @kbd{Alt-T A} to |
| 2031 | move the file into Emacs. Binding this tool to a keystroke will be | 2031 | move the file into Emacs. Binding this tool to a keystroke will be |
| 2032 | left as an exercise for the student. | 2032 | left as an exercise for the student. |
| 2033 | 2033 | ||
| 2034 | If you have the option of saving files before running tools, make sure | 2034 | If you have the option of saving files before running tools, make sure |
| 2035 | this option is set. (I don't see it on VC++ 4.0.) | 2035 | this option is set. (I don't see it on VC++ 4.0.) |
| 2036 | 2036 | ||
| 2037 | @node Borland C++ Builder | 2037 | @node Borland C++ Builder |
| 2038 | @section Emacs and Borland C++ Builder | 2038 | @section Emacs and Borland C++ Builder |
| @@ -2072,8 +2072,8 @@ Free native Windows binaries. For those that don't Cygwin may be an option. | |||
| 2072 | From Jay Rogers: | 2072 | From Jay Rogers: |
| 2073 | 2073 | ||
| 2074 | Some versions of the perl debugger itself need to be patched to work | 2074 | Some versions of the perl debugger itself need to be patched to work |
| 2075 | with emacs. They are perl versions 5.001 and less, and version | 2075 | with emacs. They are perl versions 5.001 and less, and version |
| 2076 | 5.004_01. To fix, locate and change the code similar to the following | 2076 | 5.004_01. To fix, locate and change the code similar to the following |
| 2077 | code in lib/perl5db.pl | 2077 | code in lib/perl5db.pl |
| 2078 | @example | 2078 | @example |
| 2079 | if (-e "/dev/tty") @{ | 2079 | if (-e "/dev/tty") @{ |
| @@ -2273,7 +2273,7 @@ If you have general questions about Emacs, the best places to start | |||
| 2273 | looking are @ref{Top,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, and | 2273 | looking are @ref{Top,,, emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}, and |
| 2274 | @ref{Top,,, efaq, the standard Emacs FAQ}. | 2274 | @ref{Top,,, efaq, the standard Emacs FAQ}. |
| 2275 | In Emacs, you can browse the manual using Info by typing @kbd{C-h r}, | 2275 | In Emacs, you can browse the manual using Info by typing @kbd{C-h r}, |
| 2276 | and you can view the FAQ by typing @kbd{C-h C-f}. Other resources include: | 2276 | and you can view the FAQ by typing @kbd{C-h C-f}. Other resources include: |
| 2277 | 2277 | ||
| 2278 | @itemize | 2278 | @itemize |
| 2279 | @item @uref{https://www.gnu.org/software/emacs/, The Emacs website} | 2279 | @item @uref{https://www.gnu.org/software/emacs/, The Emacs website} |
diff --git a/doc/misc/efaq.texi b/doc/misc/efaq.texi index 73bc2442678..b342e73bb52 100644 --- a/doc/misc/efaq.texi +++ b/doc/misc/efaq.texi | |||
| @@ -3692,7 +3692,7 @@ feature. | |||
| 3692 | 3692 | ||
| 3693 | Emacs has a list of local variables that are known to be safe to set. | 3693 | Emacs has a list of local variables that are known to be safe to set. |
| 3694 | If a file tries to set any variable outside this list, it asks the | 3694 | If a file tries to set any variable outside this list, it asks the |
| 3695 | user to confirm whether the variables should be set. You can also tell | 3695 | user to confirm whether the variables should be set. You can also tell |
| 3696 | Emacs whether to allow the evaluation of Emacs Lisp code found at the | 3696 | Emacs whether to allow the evaluation of Emacs Lisp code found at the |
| 3697 | bottom of files by setting the variable @code{enable-local-eval}. | 3697 | bottom of files by setting the variable @code{enable-local-eval}. |
| 3698 | 3698 | ||
| @@ -3835,7 +3835,7 @@ in the distribution. | |||
| 3835 | To build Emacs from source for MS-DOS, see the instructions in the file | 3835 | To build Emacs from source for MS-DOS, see the instructions in the file |
| 3836 | @file{msdos/INSTALL} in the distribution. The DOS port builds and runs | 3836 | @file{msdos/INSTALL} in the distribution. The DOS port builds and runs |
| 3837 | on plain DOS, and also on all versions of MS-Windows from version 3.X | 3837 | on plain DOS, and also on all versions of MS-Windows from version 3.X |
| 3838 | onwards, including Windows XP and Vista. Pre-built binaries may be | 3838 | onwards, including Windows XP and Vista. Pre-built binaries may be |
| 3839 | available at | 3839 | available at |
| 3840 | @uref{https://www.delorie.com/pub/djgpp/current/v2gnu/emacs.README} | 3840 | @uref{https://www.delorie.com/pub/djgpp/current/v2gnu/emacs.README} |
| 3841 | 3841 | ||
| @@ -4761,14 +4761,14 @@ these systems, you should configure @code{movemail} to use @code{flock}. | |||
| 4761 | Ron Isaacson says: When you hit | 4761 | Ron Isaacson says: When you hit |
| 4762 | @kbd{r} to reply in Rmail, by default it Ccs all of the original | 4762 | @kbd{r} to reply in Rmail, by default it Ccs all of the original |
| 4763 | recipients (everyone on the original @samp{To} and @samp{CC} | 4763 | recipients (everyone on the original @samp{To} and @samp{CC} |
| 4764 | lists). With a prefix argument (i.e., typing @kbd{C-u} before @kbd{r}), | 4764 | lists). With a prefix argument (i.e., typing @kbd{C-u} before @kbd{r}), |
| 4765 | it replies only to the sender. However, going through the whole | 4765 | it replies only to the sender. However, going through the whole |
| 4766 | @kbd{C-u} business every time you want to reply is a pain. This is the | 4766 | @kbd{C-u} business every time you want to reply is a pain. This is the |
| 4767 | best fix I've been able to come up with: | 4767 | best fix I've been able to come up with: |
| 4768 | 4768 | ||
| 4769 | @lisp | 4769 | @lisp |
| 4770 | (defun rmail-reply-t () | 4770 | (defun rmail-reply-t () |
| 4771 | "Reply only to the sender of the current message. (See rmail-reply.)" | 4771 | "Reply only to the sender of the current message. (See rmail-reply.)" |
| 4772 | (interactive) | 4772 | (interactive) |
| 4773 | (rmail-reply t)) | 4773 | (rmail-reply t)) |
| 4774 | 4774 | ||
diff --git a/doc/misc/eglot.texi b/doc/misc/eglot.texi index 85fef6be553..ba7aeb448e5 100644 --- a/doc/misc/eglot.texi +++ b/doc/misc/eglot.texi | |||
| @@ -1313,7 +1313,7 @@ based on compile-time information. | |||
| 1313 | 1313 | ||
| 1314 | The language server reports the regions by periodically sending a | 1314 | The language server reports the regions by periodically sending a |
| 1315 | @code{textDocument/inactiveRegions} notification for each managed | 1315 | @code{textDocument/inactiveRegions} notification for each managed |
| 1316 | buffer (@pxref{Eglot and Buffers}). Normally, unknown server | 1316 | buffer (@pxref{Eglot and Buffers}). Normally, unknown server |
| 1317 | notifications are ignored by Eglot, but we're going change that. | 1317 | notifications are ignored by Eglot, but we're going change that. |
| 1318 | 1318 | ||
| 1319 | Both the announcement of the client capability and the handling of the | 1319 | Both the announcement of the client capability and the handling of the |
| @@ -1353,7 +1353,7 @@ called @code{eglot-clangd}, so that the method would be simplified: | |||
| 1353 | However, this would require that users tweak | 1353 | However, this would require that users tweak |
| 1354 | @code{eglot-server-program} to tell Eglot instantiate such sub-classes | 1354 | @code{eglot-server-program} to tell Eglot instantiate such sub-classes |
| 1355 | instead of the generic @code{eglot-lsp-server} (@pxref{Setting Up LSP | 1355 | instead of the generic @code{eglot-lsp-server} (@pxref{Setting Up LSP |
| 1356 | Servers}). For the purposes of this particular demonstration, we're | 1356 | Servers}). For the purposes of this particular demonstration, we're |
| 1357 | going to use the more hacky regexp route which doesn't require that. | 1357 | going to use the more hacky regexp route which doesn't require that. |
| 1358 | 1358 | ||
| 1359 | Note, however, that detecting server versions before announcing new | 1359 | Note, however, that detecting server versions before announcing new |
diff --git a/doc/misc/emacs-mime.texi b/doc/misc/emacs-mime.texi index ef7ea614f8b..22bef4739a4 100644 --- a/doc/misc/emacs-mime.texi +++ b/doc/misc/emacs-mime.texi | |||
| @@ -379,7 +379,7 @@ This variable is @code{resize} by default, which means that images | |||
| 379 | that are bigger than the Emacs window are resized so that they fit. | 379 | that are bigger than the Emacs window are resized so that they fit. |
| 380 | If you set this to @code{nil}, large images are not displayed in | 380 | If you set this to @code{nil}, large images are not displayed in |
| 381 | Emacs, but can instead be displayed externally (e.g., with | 381 | Emacs, but can instead be displayed externally (e.g., with |
| 382 | @samp{ImageMagick} or @samp{xv}). Setting this variable to @code{t} | 382 | @samp{ImageMagick} or @samp{xv}). Setting this variable to @code{t} |
| 383 | disables this check and makes the library display all inline images as | 383 | disables this check and makes the library display all inline images as |
| 384 | inline, regardless of their size. | 384 | inline, regardless of their size. |
| 385 | 385 | ||
diff --git a/doc/misc/ert.texi b/doc/misc/ert.texi index cecde5f3232..109dbd0f0ce 100644 --- a/doc/misc/ert.texi +++ b/doc/misc/ert.texi | |||
| @@ -203,11 +203,11 @@ different Emacs versions. | |||
| 203 | @cindex interactive testing | 203 | @cindex interactive testing |
| 204 | 204 | ||
| 205 | @findex ert | 205 | @findex ert |
| 206 | You can run the tests that are currently defined in your Emacs with | 206 | You can run the tests that are currently defined in your Emacs with the |
| 207 | the command @kbd{M-x ert @key{RET} t @key{RET}}. (For an | 207 | command @kbd{M-x ert @key{RET} t @key{RET}}. (For an explanation of the |
| 208 | explanation of the @code{t} argument, @pxref{Test Selectors}.) ERT will pop | 208 | @code{t} argument, @pxref{Test Selectors}.) ERT will pop up a new |
| 209 | up a new buffer, the ERT results buffer, showing the results of the | 209 | buffer, the ERT results buffer, showing the results of the tests run. |
| 210 | tests run. It looks like this: | 210 | It looks like this: |
| 211 | 211 | ||
| 212 | @example | 212 | @example |
| 213 | Selector: t | 213 | Selector: t |
diff --git a/doc/misc/eshell.texi b/doc/misc/eshell.texi index eb32b1fd5f7..f8abb3d860a 100644 --- a/doc/misc/eshell.texi +++ b/doc/misc/eshell.texi | |||
| @@ -344,7 +344,7 @@ form} or in @dfn{Lisp form}. | |||
| 344 | 344 | ||
| 345 | You can use the semicolon (@code{;}) to separate multiple command | 345 | You can use the semicolon (@code{;}) to separate multiple command |
| 346 | invocations on a single line, executing each in turn. You can also | 346 | invocations on a single line, executing each in turn. You can also |
| 347 | separate commands with @code{&&} or @code{||}. When using @code{&&}, | 347 | separate commands with @code{&&} or @code{||}. When using @code{&&}, |
| 348 | Eshell will execute the second command only if the first succeeds | 348 | Eshell will execute the second command only if the first succeeds |
| 349 | (i.e.@: has an exit status of 0); with @code{||}, Eshell will execute | 349 | (i.e.@: has an exit status of 0); with @code{||}, Eshell will execute |
| 350 | the second command only if the first fails. | 350 | the second command only if the first fails. |
| @@ -1995,7 +1995,7 @@ Matches one or more copies of the glob pattern @var{x}. Thus, | |||
| 1995 | etc. | 1995 | etc. |
| 1996 | 1996 | ||
| 1997 | @item @var{x}~@var{y} | 1997 | @item @var{x}~@var{y} |
| 1998 | Matches anything that matches the pattern @var{x} but not @var{y}. For | 1998 | Matches anything that matches the pattern @var{x} but not @var{y}. For |
| 1999 | example, @samp{[[:digit:]]#~4?} matches @file{1} and @file{12}, but | 1999 | example, @samp{[[:digit:]]#~4?} matches @file{1} and @file{12}, but |
| 2000 | not @file{42}. Note that unlike in Zsh, only a single @samp{~} | 2000 | not @file{42}. Note that unlike in Zsh, only a single @samp{~} |
| 2001 | operator can be used in a pattern, and it cannot be inside of a group | 2001 | operator can be used in a pattern, and it cannot be inside of a group |
| @@ -2416,9 +2416,9 @@ Adds the text passed to it to the clipboard. | |||
| 2416 | @findex eshell-close-target | 2416 | @findex eshell-close-target |
| 2417 | You can, of course, define your own virtual targets. These are entries | 2417 | You can, of course, define your own virtual targets. These are entries |
| 2418 | in @code{eshell-virtual-targets} with the form @samp{(@var{filename} | 2418 | in @code{eshell-virtual-targets} with the form @samp{(@var{filename} |
| 2419 | @var{output-function} @var{pass-mode})}. The first element, | 2419 | @var{output-function} @var{pass-mode})}. The first element, |
| 2420 | @var{filename}, is the device name, usually of the form | 2420 | @var{filename}, is the device name, usually of the form |
| 2421 | @samp{"/dev/@var{name}"}. The second, @var{output-function}, should be a | 2421 | @samp{"/dev/@var{name}"}. The second, @var{output-function}, should be a |
| 2422 | function: Eshell will repeatedly call it with the redirected output. | 2422 | function: Eshell will repeatedly call it with the redirected output. |
| 2423 | This argument can also be an @code{eshell-generic-target} instance. In | 2423 | This argument can also be an @code{eshell-generic-target} instance. In |
| 2424 | this case, Eshell will repeatedly call the generic function | 2424 | this case, Eshell will repeatedly call the generic function |
| @@ -2547,7 +2547,7 @@ for the built-in functions and some common external commands, and you | |||
| 2547 | can define your own for any command. | 2547 | can define your own for any command. |
| 2548 | 2548 | ||
| 2549 | @kindex TAB | 2549 | @kindex TAB |
| 2550 | Eshell completion also works for Lisp forms and glob patterns. If the | 2550 | Eshell completion also works for Lisp forms and glob patterns. If the |
| 2551 | point is on a Lisp form, then @key{TAB} will behave similarly to | 2551 | point is on a Lisp form, then @key{TAB} will behave similarly to |
| 2552 | completion in @code{elisp-mode} and @code{lisp-interaction-mode}. For | 2552 | completion in @code{elisp-mode} and @code{lisp-interaction-mode}. For |
| 2553 | glob patterns, the pattern will be removed from the input line, and | 2553 | glob patterns, the pattern will be removed from the input line, and |
| @@ -2985,7 +2985,7 @@ Also a new @command{less} buffer was created with nothing in it@dots{} | |||
| 2985 | If @command{less.exe} is invoked from the Eshell command line, the | 2985 | If @command{less.exe} is invoked from the Eshell command line, the |
| 2986 | expected output is written to the buffer. | 2986 | expected output is written to the buffer. |
| 2987 | 2987 | ||
| 2988 | Note that this happens on NT-Emacs 20.6.1 on Windows 2000. The term.el | 2988 | Note that this happens on NT-Emacs 20.6.1 on Windows 2000. The term.el |
| 2989 | package and the supplied shell both use the @command{cmdproxy} program | 2989 | package and the supplied shell both use the @command{cmdproxy} program |
| 2990 | for running shells. | 2990 | for running shells. |
| 2991 | 2991 | ||
diff --git a/doc/misc/eudc.texi b/doc/misc/eudc.texi index 615ab76c326..0a16f2561f7 100644 --- a/doc/misc/eudc.texi +++ b/doc/misc/eudc.texi | |||
| @@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Quoted from RFC 1777: | |||
| 131 | @quotation | 131 | @quotation |
| 132 | [LDAP] is designed to provide access to the X.500 Directory while not | 132 | [LDAP] is designed to provide access to the X.500 Directory while not |
| 133 | incurring the resource requirements of the Directory Access Protocol | 133 | incurring the resource requirements of the Directory Access Protocol |
| 134 | (DAP). This protocol is specifically targeted at simple management | 134 | (DAP). This protocol is specifically targeted at simple management |
| 135 | applications and browser applications that provide simple read/write | 135 | applications and browser applications that provide simple read/write |
| 136 | interactive access to the X.500 Directory, and is intended to be a | 136 | interactive access to the X.500 Directory, and is intended to be a |
| 137 | complement to the DAP itself. | 137 | complement to the DAP itself. |
| @@ -564,7 +564,7 @@ to customize in this process. | |||
| 564 | 564 | ||
| 565 | Before doing any query you will need to set the directory server. You | 565 | Before doing any query you will need to set the directory server. You |
| 566 | need to specify the name of the host machine running the server software | 566 | need to specify the name of the host machine running the server software |
| 567 | and the protocol to use. If you do not set the server in any fashion, | 567 | and the protocol to use. If you do not set the server in any fashion, |
| 568 | EUDC will ask you for one when you make your first query. | 568 | EUDC will ask you for one when you make your first query. |
| 569 | 569 | ||
| 570 | You can set the server by selecting one from your hotlist of servers | 570 | You can set the server by selecting one from your hotlist of servers |
| @@ -579,9 +579,9 @@ buffer will be displayed where you can edit the search base and other | |||
| 579 | parameters for the server. | 579 | parameters for the server. |
| 580 | 580 | ||
| 581 | @defvar eudc-server | 581 | @defvar eudc-server |
| 582 | The name or IP address of the remote directory server. A TCP port number | 582 | The name or IP address of the remote directory server. A TCP port number |
| 583 | may be specified by appending a colon and a number to the name of the | 583 | may be specified by appending a colon and a number to the name of the |
| 584 | server. You will not need this unless your server runs on a port other | 584 | server. You will not need this unless your server runs on a port other |
| 585 | than the default (which depends on the protocol). | 585 | than the default (which depends on the protocol). |
| 586 | If the directory server resides on your own computer (which is the case | 586 | If the directory server resides on your own computer (which is the case |
| 587 | if you use the BBDB back end) then @samp{localhost} is a reasonable value but | 587 | if you use the BBDB back end) then @samp{localhost} is a reasonable value but |
| @@ -609,12 +609,12 @@ attributes you want to see, if different from the server defaults. | |||
| 609 | @defvar eudc-default-return-attributes | 609 | @defvar eudc-default-return-attributes |
| 610 | A list of the default attributes to extract from directory entries. If | 610 | A list of the default attributes to extract from directory entries. If |
| 611 | set to the symbol @code{all} then all available attributes are | 611 | set to the symbol @code{all} then all available attributes are |
| 612 | returned. A value of @code{nil}, the default, means to return the | 612 | returned. A value of @code{nil}, the default, means to return the |
| 613 | default attributes as configured in the server. | 613 | default attributes as configured in the server. |
| 614 | @end defvar | 614 | @end defvar |
| 615 | 615 | ||
| 616 | The server may return several matching records to a query. Some of the | 616 | The server may return several matching records to a query. Some of the |
| 617 | records may however not contain all the attributes you requested. You can | 617 | records may however not contain all the attributes you requested. You can |
| 618 | discard those records. | 618 | discard those records. |
| 619 | 619 | ||
| 620 | @defopt eudc-strict-return-matches | 620 | @defopt eudc-strict-return-matches |
| @@ -626,32 +626,32 @@ attributes are ignored. Default is @code{t}. | |||
| 626 | @subsection Duplicate Attributes | 626 | @subsection Duplicate Attributes |
| 627 | 627 | ||
| 628 | Directory standards may authorize different instances of the same | 628 | Directory standards may authorize different instances of the same |
| 629 | attribute in a record. For instance the record of a person may contain | 629 | attribute in a record. For instance the record of a person may contain |
| 630 | several email fields containing different email addresses, in which | 630 | several email fields containing different email addresses, in which |
| 631 | case EUDC will consider the attribute duplicated. | 631 | case EUDC will consider the attribute duplicated. |
| 632 | 632 | ||
| 633 | EUDC has several methods to deal with duplicated attributes. The | 633 | EUDC has several methods to deal with duplicated attributes. The |
| 634 | available methods are: | 634 | available methods are: |
| 635 | 635 | ||
| 636 | @table @code | 636 | @table @code |
| 637 | @item list | 637 | @item list |
| 638 | Makes a list with the different values of the duplicate attribute. The | 638 | Makes a list with the different values of the duplicate attribute. The |
| 639 | record is returned with only one instance of the attribute with a list | 639 | record is returned with only one instance of the attribute with a list |
| 640 | of all the different values as a value. This is the default method that | 640 | of all the different values as a value. This is the default method that |
| 641 | is used to handle duplicate fields for which no other method has been | 641 | is used to handle duplicate fields for which no other method has been |
| 642 | specified. | 642 | specified. |
| 643 | @item first | 643 | @item first |
| 644 | Discards all the duplicate values of the field keeping only the first | 644 | Discards all the duplicate values of the field keeping only the first |
| 645 | one. | 645 | one. |
| 646 | @item concat | 646 | @item concat |
| 647 | Concatenates the different values using a newline as a separator. The | 647 | Concatenates the different values using a newline as a separator. The |
| 648 | record keeps only one instance of the field the value of which is a | 648 | record keeps only one instance of the field the value of which is a |
| 649 | single multi-line string. | 649 | single multi-line string. |
| 650 | @item duplicate | 650 | @item duplicate |
| 651 | Duplicates the whole record into as many instances as there are different | 651 | Duplicates the whole record into as many instances as there are different |
| 652 | values for the field. This is the default for the email field. Thus a | 652 | values for the field. This is the default for the email field. Thus a |
| 653 | record containing 3 different email addresses is duplicated into three | 653 | record containing 3 different email addresses is duplicated into three |
| 654 | different records each having a single email address. This is | 654 | different records each having a single email address. This is |
| 655 | particularly useful in combination with @code{select} as the method to | 655 | particularly useful in combination with @code{select} as the method to |
| 656 | handle multiple matches in inline expansion queries (@pxref{Inline Query | 656 | handle multiple matches in inline expansion queries (@pxref{Inline Query |
| 657 | Expansion}) because you are presented with the 3 addresses in a | 657 | Expansion}) because you are presented with the 3 addresses in a |
| @@ -667,7 +667,7 @@ A method to handle entries containing duplicate attributes. This is | |||
| 667 | either an alist of elements @code{(@var{attr} . @var{method})}, or a symbol | 667 | either an alist of elements @code{(@var{attr} . @var{method})}, or a symbol |
| 668 | @var{method}. The alist form of the variable associates a method to an | 668 | @var{method}. The alist form of the variable associates a method to an |
| 669 | individual attribute name; the second form specifies a method applicable | 669 | individual attribute name; the second form specifies a method applicable |
| 670 | to all attribute names. Available methods are: @code{list}, | 670 | to all attribute names. Available methods are: @code{list}, |
| 671 | @code{first}, @code{concat}, and @code{duplicate} (see above). The default is | 671 | @code{first}, @code{concat}, and @code{duplicate} (see above). The default is |
| 672 | @code{list}. | 672 | @code{list}. |
| 673 | @end defvar | 673 | @end defvar |
| @@ -678,8 +678,8 @@ to all attribute names. Available methods are: @code{list}, | |||
| 678 | @section Query Form | 678 | @section Query Form |
| 679 | 679 | ||
| 680 | The simplest way to query your directory server is to use the query | 680 | The simplest way to query your directory server is to use the query |
| 681 | form. You display the query form with the @samp{Query with Form} menu | 681 | form. You display the query form with the @samp{Query with Form} menu |
| 682 | item or by invoking the command @kbd{M-x eudc-query-form}. The attribute | 682 | item or by invoking the command @kbd{M-x eudc-query-form}. The attribute |
| 683 | names presented in this form are defined by the | 683 | names presented in this form are defined by the |
| 684 | @code{eudc-query-form-attributes} variable (unless a non-@code{nil} | 684 | @code{eudc-query-form-attributes} variable (unless a non-@code{nil} |
| 685 | argument is supplied to @code{eudc-query-form}). | 685 | argument is supplied to @code{eudc-query-form}). |
| @@ -717,7 +717,7 @@ names for directory attribute names. This variable is ignored if | |||
| 717 | 717 | ||
| 718 | @defvar eudc-user-attribute-names-alist | 718 | @defvar eudc-user-attribute-names-alist |
| 719 | This is an alist of user-defined names for the directory attributes used in | 719 | This is an alist of user-defined names for the directory attributes used in |
| 720 | query/response forms. Prompt strings for attributes that are not in this | 720 | query/response forms. Prompt strings for attributes that are not in this |
| 721 | alist are derived by splitting the attribute name at underscores and | 721 | alist are derived by splitting the attribute name at underscores and |
| 722 | capitalizing the individual words. | 722 | capitalizing the individual words. |
| 723 | @end defvar | 723 | @end defvar |
| @@ -893,7 +893,7 @@ against the @code{cn} attribute of LDAP servers: | |||
| 893 | 893 | ||
| 894 | @defvar eudc-inline-expansion-format | 894 | @defvar eudc-inline-expansion-format |
| 895 | This variable lets you control exactly what is inserted into the | 895 | This variable lets you control exactly what is inserted into the |
| 896 | buffer upon an inline expansion request. It can be set to @code{nil}, | 896 | buffer upon an inline expansion request. It can be set to @code{nil}, |
| 897 | to a function, or to a list. Default is @code{nil}. | 897 | to a function, or to a list. Default is @code{nil}. |
| 898 | 898 | ||
| 899 | When the value is a list, the first element is a string passed to | 899 | When the value is a list, the first element is a string passed to |
| @@ -926,7 +926,7 @@ any of the formats: | |||
| 926 | 926 | ||
| 927 | Email address specifications, as are generated by inline expansion, | 927 | Email address specifications, as are generated by inline expansion, |
| 928 | need to comply with RFC 5322 in order to be useful in email | 928 | need to comply with RFC 5322 in order to be useful in email |
| 929 | messages. When an invalid address specification is present in an email | 929 | messages. When an invalid address specification is present in an email |
| 930 | message header, the message is likely to be rejected by a receiving | 930 | message header, the message is likely to be rejected by a receiving |
| 931 | MTA. It is hence recommended to switch old configurations, which use | 931 | MTA. It is hence recommended to switch old configurations, which use |
| 932 | a list value, to the new @code{nil}, or function value type since it | 932 | a list value, to the new @code{nil}, or function value type since it |
diff --git a/doc/misc/flymake.texi b/doc/misc/flymake.texi index 6b605a6c095..af9639ebb5a 100644 --- a/doc/misc/flymake.texi +++ b/doc/misc/flymake.texi | |||
| @@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ The following statuses are defined: | |||
| 194 | @item [@var{nerrors} @var{nwarnings} ...] | 194 | @item [@var{nerrors} @var{nwarnings} ...] |
| 195 | @tab Normal operation. @var{nerrors} and @var{nwarnings} are, respectively, | 195 | @tab Normal operation. @var{nerrors} and @var{nwarnings} are, respectively, |
| 196 | the total number of errors and warnings found during the last buffer | 196 | the total number of errors and warnings found during the last buffer |
| 197 | check, for all backends. They may be followed by other totals for | 197 | check, for all backends. They may be followed by other totals for |
| 198 | other types of diagnostics (@pxref{Flymake error types}). | 198 | other types of diagnostics (@pxref{Flymake error types}). |
| 199 | 199 | ||
| 200 | @item @code{Wait} | 200 | @item @code{Wait} |
diff --git a/doc/misc/forms.texi b/doc/misc/forms.texi index e0221d90fd9..226445ff9a0 100644 --- a/doc/misc/forms.texi +++ b/doc/misc/forms.texi | |||
| @@ -298,9 +298,9 @@ Similar to @code{forms-next-field} but moves backwards. | |||
| 298 | @item M-x forms-save-buffer | 298 | @item M-x forms-save-buffer |
| 299 | @kindex C-x C-s | 299 | @kindex C-x C-s |
| 300 | @itemx C-x C-s | 300 | @itemx C-x C-s |
| 301 | Forms mode replacement for @code{save-buffer}. When executed in the | 301 | Forms mode replacement for @code{save-buffer}. When executed in the |
| 302 | forms buffer it will save the contents of the (modified) data buffer | 302 | forms buffer it will save the contents of the (modified) data buffer |
| 303 | instead. In Forms mode this function will be bound to @kbd{C-x C-s}. | 303 | instead. In Forms mode this function will be bound to @kbd{C-x C-s}. |
| 304 | 304 | ||
| 305 | @findex forms-print | 305 | @findex forms-print |
| 306 | @item M-x forms-print | 306 | @item M-x forms-print |
| @@ -374,10 +374,10 @@ string @code{forms-field-sep}, which is @code{"\t"} (a Tab) by default. | |||
| 374 | If the format of the data file is not suitable enough you can define the | 374 | If the format of the data file is not suitable enough you can define the |
| 375 | filter functions @code{forms-read-file-filter} and | 375 | filter functions @code{forms-read-file-filter} and |
| 376 | @code{forms-write-file-filter}. @code{forms-read-file-filter} is called | 376 | @code{forms-write-file-filter}. @code{forms-read-file-filter} is called |
| 377 | when the data file is read from disk into the data buffer. It operates | 377 | when the data file is read from disk into the data buffer. It operates |
| 378 | on the data buffer, ignoring read-only protections. When the data file | 378 | on the data buffer, ignoring read-only protections. When the data file |
| 379 | is saved to disk @code{forms-write-file-filter} is called to cancel the | 379 | is saved to disk @code{forms-write-file-filter} is called to cancel the |
| 380 | effects of @code{forms-read-file-filter}. After being saved, | 380 | effects of @code{forms-read-file-filter}. After being saved, |
| 381 | @code{forms-read-file-filter} is called again to prepare the data buffer | 381 | @code{forms-read-file-filter} is called again to prepare the data buffer |
| 382 | for further processing. | 382 | for further processing. |
| 383 | 383 | ||
| @@ -488,7 +488,7 @@ The default value is @code{"\^k"}, the character Control-K@. Example: | |||
| 488 | @findex forms-read-file-filter | 488 | @findex forms-read-file-filter |
| 489 | @item forms-read-file-filter | 489 | @item forms-read-file-filter |
| 490 | This variable holds the name of a function to be called after the data | 490 | This variable holds the name of a function to be called after the data |
| 491 | file has been read in. This can be used to transform the contents of the | 491 | file has been read in. This can be used to transform the contents of the |
| 492 | data file into a format more suitable for forms processing. | 492 | data file into a format more suitable for forms processing. |
| 493 | If it is @code{nil}, no function is called. For example, to maintain a | 493 | If it is @code{nil}, no function is called. For example, to maintain a |
| 494 | gzipped database: | 494 | gzipped database: |
| @@ -533,7 +533,7 @@ modified, just before updating the Forms data file. If it is | |||
| 533 | @findex forms-insert-after | 533 | @findex forms-insert-after |
| 534 | @item forms-insert-after | 534 | @item forms-insert-after |
| 535 | If this variable is not @code{nil}, new records are created @emph{after} the | 535 | If this variable is not @code{nil}, new records are created @emph{after} the |
| 536 | current record. Also, upon visiting a file, the initial position will be | 536 | current record. Also, upon visiting a file, the initial position will be |
| 537 | at the last record instead of the first one. | 537 | at the last record instead of the first one. |
| 538 | 538 | ||
| 539 | @findex forms-check-number-of-fields | 539 | @findex forms-check-number-of-fields |
| @@ -798,8 +798,8 @@ newline in a field, while @code{forms-multi-line} was @code{nil}. | |||
| 798 | 798 | ||
| 799 | @item Field separator occurs in record - update refused! | 799 | @item Field separator occurs in record - update refused! |
| 800 | The current record contains the field separator string inside one of the | 800 | The current record contains the field separator string inside one of the |
| 801 | fields. It can not be written back to the data file, for it would | 801 | fields. It can not be written back to the data file, for it would |
| 802 | corrupt it. Probably you inserted the field separator string in a field. | 802 | corrupt it. Probably you inserted the field separator string in a field. |
| 803 | 803 | ||
| 804 | @item Record number @var{xx} out of range 1..@var{yy} | 804 | @item Record number @var{xx} out of range 1..@var{yy} |
| 805 | A jump was made to non-existing record @var{xx}. @var{yy} denotes the | 805 | A jump was made to non-existing record @var{xx}. @var{yy} denotes the |
| @@ -813,7 +813,7 @@ An attempt was made to enable edit mode on a file that has been write | |||
| 813 | protected. | 813 | protected. |
| 814 | 814 | ||
| 815 | @item Search failed: @var{regexp} | 815 | @item Search failed: @var{regexp} |
| 816 | The @var{regexp} could not be found in the data file. Forward searching | 816 | The @var{regexp} could not be found in the data file. Forward searching |
| 817 | is done from the current location until the end of the file, then | 817 | is done from the current location until the end of the file, then |
| 818 | retrying from the beginning of the file until the current location. | 818 | retrying from the beginning of the file until the current location. |
| 819 | Backward searching is done from the current location until the beginning | 819 | Backward searching is done from the current location until the beginning |
| @@ -828,7 +828,7 @@ Forms mode's idea of the number of records has been adjusted to the | |||
| 828 | number of records actually present in the data file. | 828 | number of records actually present in the data file. |
| 829 | 829 | ||
| 830 | @item Problem saving buffers? | 830 | @item Problem saving buffers? |
| 831 | An error occurred while saving the data file buffer. Most likely, Emacs | 831 | An error occurred while saving the data file buffer. Most likely, Emacs |
| 832 | did ask to confirm deleting the buffer because it had been modified, and | 832 | did ask to confirm deleting the buffer because it had been modified, and |
| 833 | you said ``no''. | 833 | you said ``no''. |
| 834 | @end table | 834 | @end table |
diff --git a/doc/misc/gnus-faq.texi b/doc/misc/gnus-faq.texi index 33c9f3bea81..a773d48417c 100644 --- a/doc/misc/gnus-faq.texi +++ b/doc/misc/gnus-faq.texi | |||
| @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ development version that became Gnus 5.12. | |||
| 115 | * FAQ 2-4:: My group buffer becomes a bit crowded, is there a way to | 115 | * FAQ 2-4:: My group buffer becomes a bit crowded, is there a way to |
| 116 | sort my groups into categories so I can easier browse through | 116 | sort my groups into categories so I can easier browse through |
| 117 | them? | 117 | them? |
| 118 | * FAQ 2-5:: How to manually sort the groups in Group buffer? How to | 118 | * FAQ 2-5:: How to manually sort the groups in Group buffer? How to |
| 119 | sort the groups in a topic? | 119 | sort the groups in a topic? |
| 120 | @end menu | 120 | @end menu |
| 121 | 121 | ||
| @@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ what's this? | |||
| 146 | @subsubheading Answer | 146 | @subsubheading Answer |
| 147 | 147 | ||
| 148 | You get the message described in the q/a pair above while | 148 | You get the message described in the q/a pair above while |
| 149 | starting Gnus, right? It's another symptom for the same | 149 | starting Gnus, right? It's another symptom for the same |
| 150 | problem, so read the answer above. | 150 | problem, so read the answer above. |
| 151 | 151 | ||
| 152 | @node FAQ 2-3 | 152 | @node FAQ 2-3 |
| @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ groups nicely indented. | |||
| 190 | @node FAQ 2-5 | 190 | @node FAQ 2-5 |
| 191 | @subsubheading Question 2.5 | 191 | @subsubheading Question 2.5 |
| 192 | 192 | ||
| 193 | How to manually sort the groups in Group buffer? How to | 193 | How to manually sort the groups in Group buffer? How to |
| 194 | sort the groups in a topic? | 194 | sort the groups in a topic? |
| 195 | 195 | ||
| 196 | @subsubheading Answer | 196 | @subsubheading Answer |
| @@ -583,7 +583,7 @@ each POP3 mail source. @xref{Mail Source Specifiers}, for details on | |||
| 583 | * FAQ 4-8:: Is there anything I can do to make poorly formatted | 583 | * FAQ 4-8:: Is there anything I can do to make poorly formatted |
| 584 | mails more readable? | 584 | mails more readable? |
| 585 | * FAQ 4-9:: Is there a way to automatically ignore posts by specific | 585 | * FAQ 4-9:: Is there a way to automatically ignore posts by specific |
| 586 | authors or with specific words in the subject? And can I | 586 | authors or with specific words in the subject? And can I |
| 587 | highlight more interesting ones in some way? | 587 | highlight more interesting ones in some way? |
| 588 | * FAQ 4-10:: How can I disable threading in some (e.g., mail-) groups, | 588 | * FAQ 4-10:: How can I disable threading in some (e.g., mail-) groups, |
| 589 | or set other variables specific for some groups? | 589 | or set other variables specific for some groups? |
| @@ -593,7 +593,7 @@ each POP3 mail source. @xref{Mail Source Specifiers}, for details on | |||
| 593 | displays in group buffer is by far to high, especially in mail | 593 | displays in group buffer is by far to high, especially in mail |
| 594 | groups. Is this a bug? | 594 | groups. Is this a bug? |
| 595 | * FAQ 4-13:: I don't like the layout of summary and article buffer, | 595 | * FAQ 4-13:: I don't like the layout of summary and article buffer, |
| 596 | how to change it? Perhaps even a three pane display? | 596 | how to change it? Perhaps even a three pane display? |
| 597 | * FAQ 4-14:: I don't like the way the Summary buffer looks, how to | 597 | * FAQ 4-14:: I don't like the way the Summary buffer looks, how to |
| 598 | tweak it? | 598 | tweak it? |
| 599 | * FAQ 4-15:: How to split incoming mails in several groups? | 599 | * FAQ 4-15:: How to split incoming mails in several groups? |
| @@ -750,7 +750,7 @@ other deuglifications). | |||
| 750 | @subsubheading Question 4.9 | 750 | @subsubheading Question 4.9 |
| 751 | 751 | ||
| 752 | Is there a way to automatically ignore posts by specific | 752 | Is there a way to automatically ignore posts by specific |
| 753 | authors or with specific words in the subject? And can I | 753 | authors or with specific words in the subject? And can I |
| 754 | highlight more interesting ones in some way? | 754 | highlight more interesting ones in some way? |
| 755 | 755 | ||
| 756 | @subsubheading Answer | 756 | @subsubheading Answer |
| @@ -876,7 +876,7 @@ groups again). | |||
| 876 | @subsubheading Question 4.13 | 876 | @subsubheading Question 4.13 |
| 877 | 877 | ||
| 878 | I don't like the layout of summary and article buffer, how | 878 | I don't like the layout of summary and article buffer, how |
| 879 | to change it? Perhaps even a three pane display? | 879 | to change it? Perhaps even a three pane display? |
| 880 | 880 | ||
| 881 | @subsubheading Answer | 881 | @subsubheading Answer |
| 882 | 882 | ||
| @@ -1056,7 +1056,7 @@ of the variables @code{shr-color-visible-distance-min} and | |||
| 1056 | signature...? | 1056 | signature...? |
| 1057 | * FAQ 5-4:: Can I set things like From, Signature etc. group based on | 1057 | * FAQ 5-4:: Can I set things like From, Signature etc. group based on |
| 1058 | the group I post too? | 1058 | the group I post too? |
| 1059 | * FAQ 5-5:: Is there a spell-checker? Perhaps even on-the-fly | 1059 | * FAQ 5-5:: Is there a spell-checker? Perhaps even on-the-fly |
| 1060 | spell-checking? | 1060 | spell-checking? |
| 1061 | * FAQ 5-6:: Can I set the dictionary based on the group I'm posting | 1061 | * FAQ 5-6:: Can I set the dictionary based on the group I'm posting |
| 1062 | to? | 1062 | to? |
| @@ -1212,7 +1212,7 @@ at the bottom. | |||
| 1212 | @node FAQ 5-5 | 1212 | @node FAQ 5-5 |
| 1213 | @subsubheading Question 5.5 | 1213 | @subsubheading Question 5.5 |
| 1214 | 1214 | ||
| 1215 | Is there a spell-checker? Perhaps even on-the-fly spell-checking? | 1215 | Is there a spell-checker? Perhaps even on-the-fly spell-checking? |
| 1216 | 1216 | ||
| 1217 | @subsubheading Answer | 1217 | @subsubheading Answer |
| 1218 | 1218 | ||
| @@ -1562,7 +1562,7 @@ gnu.emacs.gnus and want to archive it there are several | |||
| 1562 | solutions. The first and easiest is to save it to a file | 1562 | solutions. The first and easiest is to save it to a file |
| 1563 | by saying @kbd{O f}. However, wouldn't | 1563 | by saying @kbd{O f}. However, wouldn't |
| 1564 | it be much more convenient to have more direct access to | 1564 | it be much more convenient to have more direct access to |
| 1565 | the archived message from Gnus? If you say yes, put this | 1565 | the archived message from Gnus? If you say yes, put this |
| 1566 | snippet by Frank Haun <pille3003@@fhaun.de> in | 1566 | snippet by Frank Haun <pille3003@@fhaun.de> in |
| 1567 | @file{~/.gnus.el}: | 1567 | @file{~/.gnus.el}: |
| 1568 | 1568 | ||
| @@ -1584,7 +1584,7 @@ more then one article." | |||
| 1584 | @noindent | 1584 | @noindent |
| 1585 | 1585 | ||
| 1586 | You can now say @kbd{M-x my-archive-article} in summary buffer to | 1586 | You can now say @kbd{M-x my-archive-article} in summary buffer to |
| 1587 | archive the article under the cursor in a nnml group. (Change nnml to | 1587 | archive the article under the cursor in a nnml group. (Change nnml to |
| 1588 | your preferred back end.) | 1588 | your preferred back end.) |
| 1589 | 1589 | ||
| 1590 | Of course you can also make sure the cache is enabled by saying | 1590 | Of course you can also make sure the cache is enabled by saying |
| @@ -1664,7 +1664,7 @@ follows a slightly different approach, here all article | |||
| 1664 | where the read mark is set are expirable. | 1664 | where the read mark is set are expirable. |
| 1665 | 1665 | ||
| 1666 | To activate auto-expire, include auto-expire in the | 1666 | To activate auto-expire, include auto-expire in the |
| 1667 | Group parameters for the group. (Hit @kbd{G | 1667 | Group parameters for the group. (Hit @kbd{G |
| 1668 | c} in summary buffer with point over the | 1668 | c} in summary buffer with point over the |
| 1669 | group to change group parameters). For total-expire add | 1669 | group to change group parameters). For total-expire add |
| 1670 | total-expire to the group-parameters. | 1670 | total-expire to the group-parameters. |
| @@ -1808,7 +1808,7 @@ other possibility is to set, again in the summary | |||
| 1808 | buffer, downloadable (%) marks for the articles you | 1808 | buffer, downloadable (%) marks for the articles you |
| 1809 | want by typing @kbd{@@} with point over | 1809 | want by typing @kbd{@@} with point over |
| 1810 | the article and then typing @kbd{J u}. | 1810 | the article and then typing @kbd{J u}. |
| 1811 | What's the difference? Well, process marks are erased as | 1811 | What's the difference? Well, process marks are erased as |
| 1812 | soon as you exit the summary buffer while downloadable | 1812 | soon as you exit the summary buffer while downloadable |
| 1813 | marks are permanent. You can actually set downloadable | 1813 | marks are permanent. You can actually set downloadable |
| 1814 | marks in several groups then use fetch session ('J s' in | 1814 | marks in several groups then use fetch session ('J s' in |
diff --git a/doc/misc/gnus.texi b/doc/misc/gnus.texi index d0ede930996..f4c87bd64dd 100644 --- a/doc/misc/gnus.texi +++ b/doc/misc/gnus.texi | |||
| @@ -5837,7 +5837,7 @@ Mail a very wide reply to the author of the current article | |||
| 5837 | (@code{gnus-summary-very-wide-reply}). A @dfn{very wide reply} is a | 5837 | (@code{gnus-summary-very-wide-reply}). A @dfn{very wide reply} is a |
| 5838 | reply that goes out to all people listed in the @code{To}, @code{From} | 5838 | reply that goes out to all people listed in the @code{To}, @code{From} |
| 5839 | (or @code{Reply-To}) and @code{Cc} headers in all the process/prefixed | 5839 | (or @code{Reply-To}) and @code{Cc} headers in all the process/prefixed |
| 5840 | articles. This command uses the process/prefix convention. If given a | 5840 | articles. This command uses the process/prefix convention. If given a |
| 5841 | prefix argument, the body of the current article will also be yanked. | 5841 | prefix argument, the body of the current article will also be yanked. |
| 5842 | 5842 | ||
| 5843 | @item S V | 5843 | @item S V |
| @@ -7424,7 +7424,7 @@ meaningful. Here's one example: | |||
| 7424 | @end lisp | 7424 | @end lisp |
| 7425 | 7425 | ||
| 7426 | And another example: the protonmail bridge adds fake message-ids to | 7426 | And another example: the protonmail bridge adds fake message-ids to |
| 7427 | @code{References} in message headers, which can confuse threading. To | 7427 | @code{References} in message headers, which can confuse threading. To |
| 7428 | remove these spurious ids | 7428 | remove these spurious ids |
| 7429 | 7429 | ||
| 7430 | @lisp | 7430 | @lisp |
| @@ -10558,7 +10558,7 @@ course, it'll make group entry somewhat slow. | |||
| 10558 | 10558 | ||
| 10559 | @vindex gnus-refer-thread-use-search | 10559 | @vindex gnus-refer-thread-use-search |
| 10560 | If @code{gnus-refer-thread-use-search} is @code{nil} (the default) | 10560 | If @code{gnus-refer-thread-use-search} is @code{nil} (the default) |
| 10561 | then thread-referral only looks for articles in the current group. If | 10561 | then thread-referral only looks for articles in the current group. If |
| 10562 | this variable is @code{t} the server to which the current group | 10562 | this variable is @code{t} the server to which the current group |
| 10563 | belongs is searched (provided that searching is available for the | 10563 | belongs is searched (provided that searching is available for the |
| 10564 | server's backend). If this variable is a list of servers, each server | 10564 | server's backend). If this variable is a list of servers, each server |
| @@ -14706,7 +14706,7 @@ Here's a complete example @code{nnimap} backend with a client-side | |||
| 14706 | 14706 | ||
| 14707 | If you're using Google's Gmail, you may want to see your Gmail labels | 14707 | If you're using Google's Gmail, you may want to see your Gmail labels |
| 14708 | when reading your mail. Gnus can give you this information if you ask | 14708 | when reading your mail. Gnus can give you this information if you ask |
| 14709 | for @samp{X-GM-LABELS} in the variable @code{gnus-extra-headers}. For | 14709 | for @samp{X-GM-LABELS} in the variable @code{gnus-extra-headers}. For |
| 14710 | example: | 14710 | example: |
| 14711 | 14711 | ||
| 14712 | @example | 14712 | @example |
| @@ -15387,7 +15387,7 @@ corresponding keywords. | |||
| 15387 | 15387 | ||
| 15388 | @item :mailbox | 15388 | @item :mailbox |
| 15389 | The name of the mailbox to get mail from. The default is @samp{INBOX} | 15389 | The name of the mailbox to get mail from. The default is @samp{INBOX} |
| 15390 | which normally is the mailbox which receives incoming mail. Instead of | 15390 | which normally is the mailbox which receives incoming mail. Instead of |
| 15391 | a single mailbox, this can be a list of mailboxes to fetch mail from. | 15391 | a single mailbox, this can be a list of mailboxes to fetch mail from. |
| 15392 | 15392 | ||
| 15393 | @item :predicate | 15393 | @item :predicate |
| @@ -20602,7 +20602,7 @@ key will lead to creation of @file{ADAPT} files.) | |||
| 20602 | @cindex score file atoms | 20602 | @cindex score file atoms |
| 20603 | @item score-fn | 20603 | @item score-fn |
| 20604 | The value of this entry should be one or more user-defined function | 20604 | The value of this entry should be one or more user-defined function |
| 20605 | names in parentheses. Each function will be called in order and the | 20605 | names in parentheses. Each function will be called in order and the |
| 20606 | returned value is required to be an integer. | 20606 | returned value is required to be an integer. |
| 20607 | 20607 | ||
| 20608 | @example | 20608 | @example |
| @@ -22355,7 +22355,7 @@ calling @code{nnmairix-search} with @samp{f:From}. | |||
| 22355 | @item G G o | 22355 | @item G G o |
| 22356 | @kindex G G o @r{(Summary)} | 22356 | @kindex G G o @r{(Summary)} |
| 22357 | @findex nnmairix-goto-original-article | 22357 | @findex nnmairix-goto-original-article |
| 22358 | (Only in @code{nnmairix} groups!) Tries determine the group this article | 22358 | (Only in @code{nnmairix} groups!) Tries determine the group this article |
| 22359 | originally came from and displays the article in this group, so that, | 22359 | originally came from and displays the article in this group, so that, |
| 22360 | e.g., replying to this article the correct posting styles/group | 22360 | e.g., replying to this article the correct posting styles/group |
| 22361 | parameters are applied (@code{nnmairix-goto-original-article}). This | 22361 | parameters are applied (@code{nnmairix-goto-original-article}). This |
| @@ -26641,13 +26641,13 @@ data across multiple machines. | |||
| 26641 | 26641 | ||
| 26642 | Very often, you want all your marks (what articles you've read, which | 26642 | Very often, you want all your marks (what articles you've read, which |
| 26643 | ones were important, and so on) to be synchronized between several | 26643 | ones were important, and so on) to be synchronized between several |
| 26644 | machines. With IMAP, that's built into the protocol, so you can read | 26644 | machines. With IMAP, that's built into the protocol, so you can read |
| 26645 | nnimap groups from many machines and they are automatically | 26645 | nnimap groups from many machines and they are automatically |
| 26646 | synchronized. But NNTP, nnrss, and many other backends do not store | 26646 | synchronized. But NNTP, nnrss, and many other backends do not store |
| 26647 | marks, so you have to do it locally. | 26647 | marks, so you have to do it locally. |
| 26648 | 26648 | ||
| 26649 | The Gnus Cloud package stores the marks, plus any files you choose, on | 26649 | The Gnus Cloud package stores the marks, plus any files you choose, on |
| 26650 | an IMAP server in a special folder. It's like a | 26650 | an IMAP server in a special folder. It's like a |
| 26651 | DropTorrentSyncBoxOakTree(TM).@footnote{The name ``Gnus Cloud'' | 26651 | DropTorrentSyncBoxOakTree(TM).@footnote{The name ``Gnus Cloud'' |
| 26652 | parodizes but otherwise has little to do with ``cloud computing'', a | 26652 | parodizes but otherwise has little to do with ``cloud computing'', a |
| 26653 | @url{https://www.gnu.org/philosophy/words-to-avoid.html#CloudComputing, | 26653 | @url{https://www.gnu.org/philosophy/words-to-avoid.html#CloudComputing, |
| @@ -26661,17 +26661,17 @@ misleading term normally best avoided}.} | |||
| 26661 | @node Gnus Cloud Setup | 26661 | @node Gnus Cloud Setup |
| 26662 | @subsection Gnus Cloud Setup | 26662 | @subsection Gnus Cloud Setup |
| 26663 | 26663 | ||
| 26664 | Setting up the Gnus Cloud takes less than a minute. From the Group | 26664 | Setting up the Gnus Cloud takes less than a minute. From the Group |
| 26665 | buffer: | 26665 | buffer: |
| 26666 | 26666 | ||
| 26667 | Press @kbd{^} to go to the Server buffer. Here you'll see all the | 26667 | Press @kbd{^} to go to the Server buffer. Here you'll see all the |
| 26668 | servers that Gnus knows. @xref{Server Buffer}. | 26668 | servers that Gnus knows. @xref{Server Buffer}. |
| 26669 | 26669 | ||
| 26670 | Then press @kbd{i} to mark any servers as cloud-synchronized (their marks are synchronized). | 26670 | Then press @kbd{i} to mark any servers as cloud-synchronized (their marks are synchronized). |
| 26671 | 26671 | ||
| 26672 | Then press @kbd{I} to mark a single server as the cloud host (it must | 26672 | Then press @kbd{I} to mark a single server as the cloud host (it must |
| 26673 | be an IMAP server, and will host a special IMAP folder with all the | 26673 | be an IMAP server, and will host a special IMAP folder with all the |
| 26674 | synchronization data). This will set the variable | 26674 | synchronization data). This will set the variable |
| 26675 | @code{gnus-cloud-method} (using the Customize facilities), then ask | 26675 | @code{gnus-cloud-method} (using the Customize facilities), then ask |
| 26676 | you to optionally upload your first CloudSynchronizationDataPack(TM). | 26676 | you to optionally upload your first CloudSynchronizationDataPack(TM). |
| 26677 | 26677 | ||
| @@ -26691,37 +26691,37 @@ Download the latest Gnus Cloud data. | |||
| 26691 | @item ~ ~ | 26691 | @item ~ ~ |
| 26692 | @findex gnus-cloud-upload-all-data | 26692 | @findex gnus-cloud-upload-all-data |
| 26693 | @cindex cloud, download | 26693 | @cindex cloud, download |
| 26694 | Upload the local Gnus Cloud data. Creates a new | 26694 | Upload the local Gnus Cloud data. Creates a new |
| 26695 | CloudSynchronizationDataPack(TM). | 26695 | CloudSynchronizationDataPack(TM). |
| 26696 | 26696 | ||
| 26697 | @end table | 26697 | @end table |
| 26698 | 26698 | ||
| 26699 | But wait, there's more. Of course there's more. So much more. You can | 26699 | But wait, there's more. Of course there's more. So much more. You can |
| 26700 | customize all of the following. | 26700 | customize all of the following. |
| 26701 | 26701 | ||
| 26702 | @defvar gnus-cloud-synced-files | 26702 | @defvar gnus-cloud-synced-files |
| 26703 | These are the files that will be part of every | 26703 | These are the files that will be part of every |
| 26704 | CloudSynchronizationDataPack(TM). They are included in every upload, | 26704 | CloudSynchronizationDataPack(TM). They are included in every upload, |
| 26705 | so don't synchronize a lot of large files. Files under 100Kb are best. | 26705 | so don't synchronize a lot of large files. Files under 100Kb are best. |
| 26706 | @end defvar | 26706 | @end defvar |
| 26707 | 26707 | ||
| 26708 | @defvar gnus-cloud-storage-method | 26708 | @defvar gnus-cloud-storage-method |
| 26709 | This is a choice from several storage methods. It's highly recommended | 26709 | This is a choice from several storage methods. It's highly recommended |
| 26710 | to use the EPG facilities. It will be automatic if have GnuPG | 26710 | to use the EPG facilities. It will be automatic if have GnuPG |
| 26711 | installed and EPG loaded. Otherwise, you could use Base64+gzip, | 26711 | installed and EPG loaded. Otherwise, you could use Base64+gzip, |
| 26712 | Base64, or no encoding. | 26712 | Base64, or no encoding. |
| 26713 | @end defvar | 26713 | @end defvar |
| 26714 | 26714 | ||
| 26715 | @defvar gnus-cloud-interactive | 26715 | @defvar gnus-cloud-interactive |
| 26716 | When this is set, and by default it is, the Gnus Cloud package will | 26716 | When this is set, and by default it is, the Gnus Cloud package will |
| 26717 | ask you for confirmation here and there. Leave it on until you're | 26717 | ask you for confirmation here and there. Leave it on until you're |
| 26718 | comfortable with the package. | 26718 | comfortable with the package. |
| 26719 | @end defvar | 26719 | @end defvar |
| 26720 | 26720 | ||
| 26721 | 26721 | ||
| 26722 | @defvar gnus-cloud-method | 26722 | @defvar gnus-cloud-method |
| 26723 | The name of the IMAP server to store the | 26723 | The name of the IMAP server to store the |
| 26724 | CloudSynchronizationDataPack(TM)s. It's easiest to set this from the | 26724 | CloudSynchronizationDataPack(TM)s. It's easiest to set this from the |
| 26725 | Server buffer (@pxref{Gnus Cloud Setup}). | 26725 | Server buffer (@pxref{Gnus Cloud Setup}). |
| 26726 | @end defvar | 26726 | @end defvar |
| 26727 | 26727 | ||
diff --git a/doc/misc/htmlfontify.texi b/doc/misc/htmlfontify.texi index 7446f3ee9f4..40d5d13b51f 100644 --- a/doc/misc/htmlfontify.texi +++ b/doc/misc/htmlfontify.texi | |||
| @@ -1167,7 +1167,7 @@ An assoc of @code{(point . @var{face-symbol})} or | |||
| 1167 | . end)} elements, in descending order of point value (i.e., from the | 1167 | . end)} elements, in descending order of point value (i.e., from the |
| 1168 | file's end to its beginning). The map is in reverse order because | 1168 | file's end to its beginning). The map is in reverse order because |
| 1169 | inserting a @samp{<style>} tag (or any other string) at @var{point} | 1169 | inserting a @samp{<style>} tag (or any other string) at @var{point} |
| 1170 | invalidates the map for all entries with a greater value of point. By | 1170 | invalidates the map for all entries with a greater value of point. By |
| 1171 | traversing the map from greatest to least @var{point}, we still | 1171 | traversing the map from greatest to least @var{point}, we still |
| 1172 | invalidate the map as we go, but only those points we have already | 1172 | invalidate the map as we go, but only those points we have already |
| 1173 | dealt with (and therefore no longer care about) will be invalid at any | 1173 | dealt with (and therefore no longer care about) will be invalid at any |
diff --git a/doc/misc/idlwave.texi b/doc/misc/idlwave.texi index 782812169ca..845c9dbd690 100644 --- a/doc/misc/idlwave.texi +++ b/doc/misc/idlwave.texi | |||
| @@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ IDLWAVE consists of two main parts: a major mode for editing IDL | |||
| 189 | source files (@code{idlwave-mode}) and a mode for running the IDL | 189 | source files (@code{idlwave-mode}) and a mode for running the IDL |
| 190 | program as an inferior shell (@code{idlwave-shell-mode}). Although | 190 | program as an inferior shell (@code{idlwave-shell-mode}). Although |
| 191 | one mode can be used without the other, both work together closely to | 191 | one mode can be used without the other, both work together closely to |
| 192 | form a complete development environment. Here is a brief summary of | 192 | form a complete development environment. Here is a brief summary of |
| 193 | what IDLWAVE does: | 193 | what IDLWAVE does: |
| 194 | 194 | ||
| 195 | @itemize @bullet | 195 | @itemize @bullet |
| @@ -504,7 +504,7 @@ keywords again? Go back to the source window and put the cursor into | |||
| 504 | the ``plot'' line and press @kbd{C-c ?}. This shows the routine info | 504 | the ``plot'' line and press @kbd{C-c ?}. This shows the routine info |
| 505 | window for the plot routine, which contains a list of keywords, along | 505 | window for the plot routine, which contains a list of keywords, along |
| 506 | with the argument list. Oh, we wanted @code{YTITLE}. Fix that up. | 506 | with the argument list. Oh, we wanted @code{YTITLE}. Fix that up. |
| 507 | Recompile with @kbd{C-c C-d C-c}. Jump back into the shell with | 507 | Recompile with @kbd{C-c C-d C-c}. Jump back into the shell with |
| 508 | @kbd{C-c C-s}, press the @key{UP} arrow to recall the previous command | 508 | @kbd{C-c C-s}, press the @key{UP} arrow to recall the previous command |
| 509 | and execute again. | 509 | and execute again. |
| 510 | 510 | ||
| @@ -566,7 +566,7 @@ directory---but do not be dismayed; for the most part, you can just | |||
| 566 | copy and work from the examples given here. | 566 | copy and work from the examples given here. |
| 567 | 567 | ||
| 568 | Let's first use a boolean variable. These are variables which you turn | 568 | Let's first use a boolean variable. These are variables which you turn |
| 569 | on or off, much like a checkbox. A value of @samp{t} means on, a value | 569 | on or off, much like a checkbox. A value of @samp{t} means on, a value |
| 570 | of @samp{nil} means off. Copy the following line into your | 570 | of @samp{nil} means off. Copy the following line into your |
| 571 | @file{.emacs} file, exit and restart Emacs. | 571 | @file{.emacs} file, exit and restart Emacs. |
| 572 | 572 | ||
| @@ -604,7 +604,7 @@ If you cannot seem to master this Lisp customization in @file{.emacs}, | |||
| 604 | there is another, more user-friendly way to customize all the IDLWAVE | 604 | there is another, more user-friendly way to customize all the IDLWAVE |
| 605 | variables. You can access it through the IDLWAVE menu in one of the | 605 | variables. You can access it through the IDLWAVE menu in one of the |
| 606 | @file{.pro} buffers, menu item @code{Customize->Browse IDLWAVE | 606 | @file{.pro} buffers, menu item @code{Customize->Browse IDLWAVE |
| 607 | Group}. Here you'll be presented with all the various variables grouped | 607 | Group}. Here you'll be presented with all the various variables grouped |
| 608 | into categories. You can navigate the hierarchy (e.g., @samp{IDLWAVE | 608 | into categories. You can navigate the hierarchy (e.g., @samp{IDLWAVE |
| 609 | Code Formatting->Idlwave Abbrev And Indent Action->Idlwave Expand | 609 | Code Formatting->Idlwave Abbrev And Indent Action->Idlwave Expand |
| 610 | Generic End} to turn on @code{END} expansion), read about the variables, | 610 | Generic End} to turn on @code{END} expansion), read about the variables, |
| @@ -1899,7 +1899,7 @@ commands. Emacs abbreviations are expanded by typing text into the | |||
| 1899 | buffer and pressing @key{SPC} or @key{RET}. The special abbreviations | 1899 | buffer and pressing @key{SPC} or @key{RET}. The special abbreviations |
| 1900 | used to insert code templates all start with a @samp{\} (the backslash), | 1900 | used to insert code templates all start with a @samp{\} (the backslash), |
| 1901 | or, optionally, any other character set in | 1901 | or, optionally, any other character set in |
| 1902 | @code{idlwave-abbrev-start-char}. IDLWAVE ensures that abbreviations are | 1902 | @code{idlwave-abbrev-start-char}. IDLWAVE ensures that abbreviations are |
| 1903 | only expanded where they should be (i.e., not in a string or comment), | 1903 | only expanded where they should be (i.e., not in a string or comment), |
| 1904 | and permits the point to be moved after an abbreviation expansion: | 1904 | and permits the point to be moved after an abbreviation expansion: |
| 1905 | very useful for positioning the mark inside of parentheses, etc. | 1905 | very useful for positioning the mark inside of parentheses, etc. |
| @@ -2659,7 +2659,7 @@ setting and clearing commands, and @code{debug} for other debug, | |||
| 2659 | stepping, and continue commands. In addition, if the variable is set to | 2659 | stepping, and continue commands. In addition, if the variable is set to |
| 2660 | the single symbol @code{'everything}, all the copious shell input is | 2660 | the single symbol @code{'everything}, all the copious shell input is |
| 2661 | displayed (which is probably only useful for debugging purposes). | 2661 | displayed (which is probably only useful for debugging purposes). |
| 2662 | N.B. For hidden commands which produce output by side-effect, that | 2662 | N.B. For hidden commands which produce output by side-effect, that |
| 2663 | output remains hidden (e.g., stepping through a @code{print} command). | 2663 | output remains hidden (e.g., stepping through a @code{print} command). |
| 2664 | As a special case, any error message in the output will be displayed | 2664 | As a special case, any error message in the output will be displayed |
| 2665 | (e.g., stepping to an error). | 2665 | (e.g., stepping to an error). |
| @@ -3429,7 +3429,7 @@ the file @file{idlw-rinfo.el}. | |||
| 3429 | IDLWAVE @emph{scans} all its @emph{buffers} in the current Emacs session | 3429 | IDLWAVE @emph{scans} all its @emph{buffers} in the current Emacs session |
| 3430 | for routine definitions. This is done automatically when routine | 3430 | for routine definitions. This is done automatically when routine |
| 3431 | information or completion is first requested by the user. Each new | 3431 | information or completion is first requested by the user. Each new |
| 3432 | buffer and each buffer saved after making changes is also scanned. The | 3432 | buffer and each buffer saved after making changes is also scanned. The |
| 3433 | command @kbd{C-c C-i} (@code{idlwave-update-routine-info}) can be used | 3433 | command @kbd{C-c C-i} (@code{idlwave-update-routine-info}) can be used |
| 3434 | at any time to rescan all buffers. | 3434 | at any time to rescan all buffers. |
| 3435 | 3435 | ||
| @@ -3786,7 +3786,7 @@ itself. | |||
| 3786 | 3786 | ||
| 3787 | There are a wide variety of possible browsers to use for displaying | 3787 | There are a wide variety of possible browsers to use for displaying |
| 3788 | the online HTML help available with IDLWAVE (starting with version | 3788 | the online HTML help available with IDLWAVE (starting with version |
| 3789 | 5.0). Since IDL v6.2, a single cross-platform HTML help browser, the | 3789 | 5.0). Since IDL v6.2, a single cross-platform HTML help browser, the |
| 3790 | @emph{IDL Assistant} is distributed with IDL@. If this help browser is | 3790 | @emph{IDL Assistant} is distributed with IDL@. If this help browser is |
| 3791 | available, it is the preferred choice, and the default. The variable | 3791 | available, it is the preferred choice, and the default. The variable |
| 3792 | @code{idlwave-help-use-assistant}, enabled by default, controls | 3792 | @code{idlwave-help-use-assistant}, enabled by default, controls |
diff --git a/doc/misc/info.texi b/doc/misc/info.texi index 01c7f614e7d..d68b8e3b261 100644 --- a/doc/misc/info.texi +++ b/doc/misc/info.texi | |||
| @@ -473,7 +473,7 @@ depends on the Info reader you use.) This is because @kbd{n} and | |||
| 473 | level}. The present node is contained in a menu (see next) of the | 473 | level}. The present node is contained in a menu (see next) of the |
| 474 | node you came from, and hence is considered to be at a lower level. | 474 | node you came from, and hence is considered to be at a lower level. |
| 475 | It is the only node in the previous node's menu (even though it was | 475 | It is the only node in the previous node's menu (even though it was |
| 476 | listed three times). Hence it has no next or previous node that | 476 | listed three times). Hence it has no next or previous node that |
| 477 | @kbd{n} or @kbd{p} could move to. | 477 | @kbd{n} or @kbd{p} could move to. |
| 478 | 478 | ||
| 479 | If you systematically move through a manual by typing @kbd{n}, you run | 479 | If you systematically move through a manual by typing @kbd{n}, you run |
diff --git a/doc/misc/message.texi b/doc/misc/message.texi index 6e0e4be7bf5..468bf81599d 100644 --- a/doc/misc/message.texi +++ b/doc/misc/message.texi | |||
| @@ -1338,8 +1338,8 @@ your PGP implementation, so we refer to it. | |||
| 1338 | 1338 | ||
| 1339 | If you have imported your old PGP 2.x key into GnuPG, and want to send | 1339 | If you have imported your old PGP 2.x key into GnuPG, and want to send |
| 1340 | signed and encrypted messages to your fellow PGP 2.x users, you'll | 1340 | signed and encrypted messages to your fellow PGP 2.x users, you'll |
| 1341 | discover that the receiver cannot understand what you send. One | 1341 | discover that the receiver cannot understand what you send. One |
| 1342 | solution is to use PGP 2.x instead. You could also convince your | 1342 | solution is to use PGP 2.x instead. You could also convince your |
| 1343 | fellow PGP 2.x users to convert to GnuPG@. | 1343 | fellow PGP 2.x users to convert to GnuPG@. |
| 1344 | @vindex mml-signencrypt-style-alist | 1344 | @vindex mml-signencrypt-style-alist |
| 1345 | As a final workaround, you can make the sign and encryption work in | 1345 | As a final workaround, you can make the sign and encryption work in |
| @@ -1687,8 +1687,8 @@ Allegedly. | |||
| 1687 | @item message-default-headers | 1687 | @item message-default-headers |
| 1688 | @vindex message-default-headers | 1688 | @vindex message-default-headers |
| 1689 | Header lines to be inserted in outgoing messages before you edit the | 1689 | Header lines to be inserted in outgoing messages before you edit the |
| 1690 | message, so you can edit or delete their lines. If set to a string, it | 1690 | message, so you can edit or delete their lines. If set to a string, it |
| 1691 | is directly inserted. If set to a function, it is called and its | 1691 | is directly inserted. If set to a function, it is called and its |
| 1692 | result is inserted. | 1692 | result is inserted. |
| 1693 | 1693 | ||
| 1694 | @item message-subject-re-regexp | 1694 | @item message-subject-re-regexp |
| @@ -2190,7 +2190,7 @@ posting a prepared news message. | |||
| 2190 | @table @code | 2190 | @table @code |
| 2191 | @item message-cite-style | 2191 | @item message-cite-style |
| 2192 | @vindex message-cite-style | 2192 | @vindex message-cite-style |
| 2193 | The overall style to be used when replying to messages. This controls | 2193 | The overall style to be used when replying to messages. This controls |
| 2194 | things like where the reply should be put relative to the original, | 2194 | things like where the reply should be put relative to the original, |
| 2195 | how the citation is formatted, where the signature goes, etc. | 2195 | how the citation is formatted, where the signature goes, etc. |
| 2196 | 2196 | ||
| @@ -2198,12 +2198,12 @@ Value is either @code{nil} (no variable overrides) or a let-style list | |||
| 2198 | of pairs @code{(VARIABLE VALUE)} to override default values. | 2198 | of pairs @code{(VARIABLE VALUE)} to override default values. |
| 2199 | 2199 | ||
| 2200 | See @code{gnus-posting-styles} to set this variable for specific | 2200 | See @code{gnus-posting-styles} to set this variable for specific |
| 2201 | groups. Presets to impersonate popular mail agents are available in the | 2201 | groups. Presets to impersonate popular mail agents are available in the |
| 2202 | @code{message-cite-style-*} variables. | 2202 | @code{message-cite-style-*} variables. |
| 2203 | 2203 | ||
| 2204 | @item message-cite-reply-position | 2204 | @item message-cite-reply-position |
| 2205 | @vindex message-cite-reply-position | 2205 | @vindex message-cite-reply-position |
| 2206 | Where the reply should be positioned. Available styles are | 2206 | Where the reply should be positioned. Available styles are |
| 2207 | @code{traditional} to reply inline, @code{above} for top-posting, and | 2207 | @code{traditional} to reply inline, @code{above} for top-posting, and |
| 2208 | @code{below} for bottom-posting | 2208 | @code{below} for bottom-posting |
| 2209 | 2209 | ||
diff --git a/doc/misc/modus-themes.org b/doc/misc/modus-themes.org index 1006359c6e1..20fa93c6dbc 100644 --- a/doc/misc/modus-themes.org +++ b/doc/misc/modus-themes.org | |||
| @@ -1237,7 +1237,7 @@ and ==*modus-operandi-list-mappings*= for the semantic color mappings. | |||
| 1237 | :END: | 1237 | :END: |
| 1238 | 1238 | ||
| 1239 | The Modus themes provide the means to access the palette of (i) the | 1239 | The Modus themes provide the means to access the palette of (i) the |
| 1240 | active theme or (ii) any theme in the Modus collection. These are | 1240 | active theme or (ii) any theme in the Modus collection. These are |
| 1241 | useful for Do-It-Yourself customizations ([[#h:f4651d55-8c07-46aa-b52b-bed1e53463bb][Advanced customization]]), | 1241 | useful for Do-It-Yourself customizations ([[#h:f4651d55-8c07-46aa-b52b-bed1e53463bb][Advanced customization]]), |
| 1242 | though it can also be helpful in other cases, such as to reuse a color | 1242 | though it can also be helpful in other cases, such as to reuse a color |
| 1243 | value in some other application. | 1243 | value in some other application. |
| @@ -1252,8 +1252,8 @@ value in some other application. | |||
| 1252 | 1252 | ||
| 1253 | #+findex: modus-themes-get-color-value | 1253 | #+findex: modus-themes-get-color-value |
| 1254 | The function ~modus-themes-get-color-value~ can be called from Lisp to | 1254 | The function ~modus-themes-get-color-value~ can be called from Lisp to |
| 1255 | return the value of a color from the active Modus theme palette. It | 1255 | return the value of a color from the active Modus theme palette. It |
| 1256 | takea a =COLOR= argument and an optional =OVERRIDES=. It also accepts | 1256 | takea a =COLOR= argument and an optional =OVERRIDES=. It also accepts |
| 1257 | a third =THEME= argument, to get the color from the given theme. | 1257 | a third =THEME= argument, to get the color from the given theme. |
| 1258 | 1258 | ||
| 1259 | =COLOR= is a symbol that represents a named color entry in the | 1259 | =COLOR= is a symbol that represents a named color entry in the |
| @@ -1264,7 +1264,7 @@ mapping), this function recurs until it finds the underlying color | |||
| 1264 | value. | 1264 | value. |
| 1265 | 1265 | ||
| 1266 | With an optional =OVERRIDES= argument as a non-~nil~ value, it | 1266 | With an optional =OVERRIDES= argument as a non-~nil~ value, it |
| 1267 | accounts for palette overrides. Else it reads only the default palette | 1267 | accounts for palette overrides. Else it reads only the default palette |
| 1268 | ([[#h:34c7a691-19bb-4037-8d2f-67a07edab150][Option for palette overrides]]) | 1268 | ([[#h:34c7a691-19bb-4037-8d2f-67a07edab150][Option for palette overrides]]) |
| 1269 | 1269 | ||
| 1270 | With an optional =THEME= as a symbol among the ~modus-themes-items~ | 1270 | With an optional =THEME= as a symbol among the ~modus-themes-items~ |
| @@ -1309,12 +1309,12 @@ with/without overrides and when recursive mappings are introduced. | |||
| 1309 | 1309 | ||
| 1310 | #+findex: modus-themes-with-colors | 1310 | #+findex: modus-themes-with-colors |
| 1311 | Advanced users may want to apply many colors from the palette of the | 1311 | Advanced users may want to apply many colors from the palette of the |
| 1312 | active Modus theme in their custom code. In such a case, retrieving | 1312 | active Modus theme in their custom code. In such a case, retrieving |
| 1313 | each value with the function ~modus-themes-get-color-value~ is | 1313 | each value with the function ~modus-themes-get-color-value~ is |
| 1314 | inefficient ([[#h:1cc552c1-5f5f-4a56-ae78-7b69e8512c4e][Get a single color from the palette]]). The Lisp macro | 1314 | inefficient ([[#h:1cc552c1-5f5f-4a56-ae78-7b69e8512c4e][Get a single color from the palette]]). The Lisp macro |
| 1315 | ~modus-themes-with-colors~ provides the requisite functionality. It | 1315 | ~modus-themes-with-colors~ provides the requisite functionality. It |
| 1316 | supplies the current theme's palette to the code called from inside of | 1316 | supplies the current theme's palette to the code called from inside of |
| 1317 | it. For example: | 1317 | it. For example: |
| 1318 | 1318 | ||
| 1319 | #+begin_src emacs-lisp | 1319 | #+begin_src emacs-lisp |
| 1320 | (modus-themes-with-colors | 1320 | (modus-themes-with-colors |
| @@ -1323,9 +1323,9 @@ it. For example: | |||
| 1323 | #+end_src | 1323 | #+end_src |
| 1324 | 1324 | ||
| 1325 | The above return value is for ~modus-operandi~ when that is the active | 1325 | The above return value is for ~modus-operandi~ when that is the active |
| 1326 | theme. Switching to another theme and evaluating this code anew will | 1326 | theme. Switching to another theme and evaluating this code anew will |
| 1327 | return the relevant results for that theme (remember that since | 1327 | return the relevant results for that theme (remember that since |
| 1328 | version 4, the Modus themes consist of many items ([[#h:f0f3dbcb-602d-40cf-b918-8f929c441baf][Overview]])). The | 1328 | version 4, the Modus themes consist of many items ([[#h:f0f3dbcb-602d-40cf-b918-8f929c441baf][Overview]])). The |
| 1329 | same with ~modus-vivendi~ as the active theme: | 1329 | same with ~modus-vivendi~ as the active theme: |
| 1330 | 1330 | ||
| 1331 | #+begin_src emacs-lisp | 1331 | #+begin_src emacs-lisp |
| @@ -1340,7 +1340,7 @@ like =blue-warmer= and (ii) semantic color mappings like =warning=. | |||
| 1340 | We provide commands to inspect those ([[#h:f4d4b71b-2ca5-4c3d-b0b4-9bfd7aa7fb4d][Preview theme colors]]). | 1340 | We provide commands to inspect those ([[#h:f4d4b71b-2ca5-4c3d-b0b4-9bfd7aa7fb4d][Preview theme colors]]). |
| 1341 | 1341 | ||
| 1342 | Others sections in this manual show how to use the aforementioned | 1342 | Others sections in this manual show how to use the aforementioned |
| 1343 | macro ([[#h:f4651d55-8c07-46aa-b52b-bed1e53463bb][Advanced customization]]). In practice, the use of a hook will | 1343 | macro ([[#h:f4651d55-8c07-46aa-b52b-bed1e53463bb][Advanced customization]]). In practice, the use of a hook will |
| 1344 | also be needed ([[#h:d87673fe-2ce1-4c80-a4b8-be36ca9f2d24][DIY Use a hook at the post-load-theme phase]]). | 1344 | also be needed ([[#h:d87673fe-2ce1-4c80-a4b8-be36ca9f2d24][DIY Use a hook at the post-load-theme phase]]). |
| 1345 | 1345 | ||
| 1346 | * Advanced customization | 1346 | * Advanced customization |
| @@ -1355,7 +1355,7 @@ mechanism to control things with precision ([[#h:bf1c82f2-46c7-4eb2-ad00-dd11fdd | |||
| 1355 | 1355 | ||
| 1356 | This section is of interest only to users who are prepared to maintain | 1356 | This section is of interest only to users who are prepared to maintain |
| 1357 | their own local tweaks and who are willing to deal with any possible | 1357 | their own local tweaks and who are willing to deal with any possible |
| 1358 | incompatibilities between versioned releases of the themes. As such, | 1358 | incompatibilities between versioned releases of the themes. As such, |
| 1359 | they are labeled as "do-it-yourself" or "DIY". | 1359 | they are labeled as "do-it-yourself" or "DIY". |
| 1360 | 1360 | ||
| 1361 | ** DIY Palette override presets | 1361 | ** DIY Palette override presets |
| @@ -2076,14 +2076,14 @@ Reload the theme for changes to take effect. | |||
| 2076 | :end: | 2076 | :end: |
| 2077 | 2077 | ||
| 2078 | This is one of our practical examples to override the semantic colors | 2078 | This is one of our practical examples to override the semantic colors |
| 2079 | of the Modus themes ([[#h:df1199d8-eaba-47db-805d-6b568a577bf3][Stylistic variants using palette overrides]]). Here | 2079 | of the Modus themes ([[#h:df1199d8-eaba-47db-805d-6b568a577bf3][Stylistic variants using palette overrides]]). Here |
| 2080 | we show how to change the presentation of Org blocks (and other such | 2080 | we show how to change the presentation of Org blocks (and other such |
| 2081 | blocks like Markdown fenced code sections, though the exact | 2081 | blocks like Markdown fenced code sections, though the exact |
| 2082 | presentation depends on each major mode). | 2082 | presentation depends on each major mode). |
| 2083 | 2083 | ||
| 2084 | The default style of Org blocks is a subtle gray background for the | 2084 | The default style of Org blocks is a subtle gray background for the |
| 2085 | contents and for the delimiter lines (the =#+begin_= and =#+end_= | 2085 | contents and for the delimiter lines (the =#+begin_= and =#+end_= |
| 2086 | parts). The text of the delimiter lines is a subtle gray foreground | 2086 | parts). The text of the delimiter lines is a subtle gray foreground |
| 2087 | color. | 2087 | color. |
| 2088 | 2088 | ||
| 2089 | [[#h:bb5b396f-5532-4d52-ab13-149ca24854f1][Make inline code in prose use alternative styles]]. | 2089 | [[#h:bb5b396f-5532-4d52-ab13-149ca24854f1][Make inline code in prose use alternative styles]]. |
| @@ -2123,8 +2123,8 @@ color. | |||
| 2123 | #+end_src | 2123 | #+end_src |
| 2124 | 2124 | ||
| 2125 | The previous examples differentiate the delimiter lines from the | 2125 | The previous examples differentiate the delimiter lines from the |
| 2126 | block's contents. Though we can mimic the default aesthetic of a | 2126 | block's contents. Though we can mimic the default aesthetic of a |
| 2127 | uniform background, while changing the applicable colors. Here are | 2127 | uniform background, while changing the applicable colors. Here are |
| 2128 | some nice combinations: | 2128 | some nice combinations: |
| 2129 | 2129 | ||
| 2130 | #+begin_src emacs-lisp | 2130 | #+begin_src emacs-lisp |
| @@ -2152,7 +2152,7 @@ some nice combinations: | |||
| 2152 | 2152 | ||
| 2153 | Finally, the following makes code blocks have no distinct background. | 2153 | Finally, the following makes code blocks have no distinct background. |
| 2154 | The minimal styles are applied to the delimiter lines, which only use | 2154 | The minimal styles are applied to the delimiter lines, which only use |
| 2155 | a subtle gray foreground. This was the default for the Modus themes up | 2155 | a subtle gray foreground. This was the default for the Modus themes up |
| 2156 | until version 4.3.0. | 2156 | until version 4.3.0. |
| 2157 | 2157 | ||
| 2158 | #+begin_src emacs-lisp | 2158 | #+begin_src emacs-lisp |
| @@ -3280,11 +3280,11 @@ invoke {{{kbd(M-x org-mode-restart)}}}. | |||
| 3280 | 3280 | ||
| 3281 | In versions of the Modus themes before =4.4.0= there was an option to | 3281 | In versions of the Modus themes before =4.4.0= there was an option to |
| 3282 | change the coloration of Org source blocks so that certain languages | 3282 | change the coloration of Org source blocks so that certain languages |
| 3283 | would have a distinctly colored background. This was not flexible | 3283 | would have a distinctly colored background. This was not flexible |
| 3284 | enough, because (i) we cannot cover all languages effectively and (ii) | 3284 | enough, because (i) we cannot cover all languages effectively and (ii) |
| 3285 | the user had no choice over the =language --> color= mapping. | 3285 | the user had no choice over the =language --> color= mapping. |
| 3286 | 3286 | ||
| 3287 | As such, the old user option is no more. Users can use the following | 3287 | As such, the old user option is no more. Users can use the following |
| 3288 | to achieve what they want: | 3288 | to achieve what they want: |
| 3289 | 3289 | ||
| 3290 | [ All this is done by setting the Org user option ~org-src-block-faces~, | 3290 | [ All this is done by setting the Org user option ~org-src-block-faces~, |
| @@ -3323,9 +3323,9 @@ to achieve what they want: | |||
| 3323 | [[#h:d87673fe-2ce1-4c80-a4b8-be36ca9f2d24][DIY Use a hook at the post-load-theme phase]]. | 3323 | [[#h:d87673fe-2ce1-4c80-a4b8-be36ca9f2d24][DIY Use a hook at the post-load-theme phase]]. |
| 3324 | 3324 | ||
| 3325 | Note that the ~org-src-block-faces~ accepts a named face, as shown | 3325 | Note that the ~org-src-block-faces~ accepts a named face, as shown |
| 3326 | above, as well as a list of face attributes. The latter approach is | 3326 | above, as well as a list of face attributes. The latter approach is |
| 3327 | not good enough because it hardcodes values in such a way that an | 3327 | not good enough because it hardcodes values in such a way that an |
| 3328 | ~org-mode-restart~ is necessary. Whereas the indirection of the named | 3328 | ~org-mode-restart~ is necessary. Whereas the indirection of the named |
| 3329 | face lets the theme change the values while Org buffers continue to | 3329 | face lets the theme change the values while Org buffers continue to |
| 3330 | show the right colors. | 3330 | show the right colors. |
| 3331 | 3331 | ||
| @@ -3768,7 +3768,7 @@ Reload the theme for changes to take effect. | |||
| 3768 | :END: | 3768 | :END: |
| 3769 | 3769 | ||
| 3770 | Many of the Do-It-Yourself (DIY) snippets provided herein make use of | 3770 | Many of the Do-It-Yourself (DIY) snippets provided herein make use of |
| 3771 | a hook to apply the desired changes. In most examples, this hook is | 3771 | a hook to apply the desired changes. In most examples, this hook is |
| 3772 | the ~modus-themes-after-load-theme-hook~ (alias ~modus-themes-post-load-hook~). | 3772 | the ~modus-themes-after-load-theme-hook~ (alias ~modus-themes-post-load-hook~). |
| 3773 | This hook is provided by the Modus themes and is called at the end of | 3773 | This hook is provided by the Modus themes and is called at the end of |
| 3774 | one the following: | 3774 | one the following: |
| @@ -3786,7 +3786,7 @@ one the following: | |||
| 3786 | 3786 | ||
| 3787 | Users who switch between themes that are not limited to the Modus | 3787 | Users who switch between themes that are not limited to the Modus |
| 3788 | collection cannot benefit from the aforementioned hook: it only works | 3788 | collection cannot benefit from the aforementioned hook: it only works |
| 3789 | with the Modus themes. A theme-agnostic hook is needed in such a case. | 3789 | with the Modus themes. A theme-agnostic hook is needed in such a case. |
| 3790 | Before Emacs 29, this had to be set up manually ([[#h:86f6906b-f090-46cc-9816-1fe8aeb38776][DIY A theme-agnostic hook for theme loading]]). | 3790 | Before Emacs 29, this had to be set up manually ([[#h:86f6906b-f090-46cc-9816-1fe8aeb38776][DIY A theme-agnostic hook for theme loading]]). |
| 3791 | Starting with Emacs 29, the special hook ~enable-theme-functions~ | 3791 | Starting with Emacs 29, the special hook ~enable-theme-functions~ |
| 3792 | works with anything that uses the basic ~enable-theme~ function. | 3792 | works with anything that uses the basic ~enable-theme~ function. |
| @@ -3799,7 +3799,7 @@ the way it is done with every hook: | |||
| 3799 | #+end_src | 3799 | #+end_src |
| 3800 | 3800 | ||
| 3801 | Functions added to ~enable-theme-functions~ accept a single =THEME= | 3801 | Functions added to ~enable-theme-functions~ accept a single =THEME= |
| 3802 | argument. The examples shown in this manual use the pattern =(&rest | 3802 | argument. The examples shown in this manual use the pattern =(&rest |
| 3803 | _)=, which is how a function accepts one or more arguments but | 3803 | _)=, which is how a function accepts one or more arguments but |
| 3804 | declares it will not use them (in plain terms, the code works with or | 3804 | declares it will not use them (in plain terms, the code works with or |
| 3805 | without ~enable-theme-functions~). | 3805 | without ~enable-theme-functions~). |
| @@ -3809,7 +3809,7 @@ without ~enable-theme-functions~). | |||
| 3809 | :custom_id: h:86f6906b-f090-46cc-9816-1fe8aeb38776 | 3809 | :custom_id: h:86f6906b-f090-46cc-9816-1fe8aeb38776 |
| 3810 | :end: | 3810 | :end: |
| 3811 | 3811 | ||
| 3812 | [ NOTE: The following is for versions of Emacs before 29. For Emacs 29 | 3812 | [ NOTE: The following is for versions of Emacs before 29. For Emacs 29 |
| 3813 | or higher, users can rely on the built-in ~enable-theme-functions~ | 3813 | or higher, users can rely on the built-in ~enable-theme-functions~ |
| 3814 | ([[#h:d87673fe-2ce1-4c80-a4b8-be36ca9f2d24][Using a hook at the post-load-theme phase]]). ] | 3814 | ([[#h:d87673fe-2ce1-4c80-a4b8-be36ca9f2d24][Using a hook at the post-load-theme phase]]). ] |
| 3815 | 3815 | ||
diff --git a/doc/misc/newsticker.texi b/doc/misc/newsticker.texi index a2ceedf7399..d6f6e5d841e 100644 --- a/doc/misc/newsticker.texi +++ b/doc/misc/newsticker.texi | |||
| @@ -73,12 +73,12 @@ modify this GNU manual.'' | |||
| 73 | 73 | ||
| 74 | Newsticker provides a @b{Feed Reader} for Emacs. It retrieves | 74 | Newsticker provides a @b{Feed Reader} for Emacs. It retrieves |
| 75 | headlines from a list of news sites, processes them, and provides | 75 | headlines from a list of news sites, processes them, and provides |
| 76 | frontends for reading and managing them. (Standard headline formats | 76 | frontends for reading and managing them. (Standard headline formats |
| 77 | are RSS and Atom which makes Newsticker an ``RSS Reader'', ``Atom | 77 | are RSS and Atom which makes Newsticker an ``RSS Reader'', ``Atom |
| 78 | Reader'' or ``Feed Aggregator''.) | 78 | Reader'' or ``Feed Aggregator''.) |
| 79 | 79 | ||
| 80 | Headlines (or news items) consist of a title, (mostly) a description, | 80 | Headlines (or news items) consist of a title, (mostly) a description, |
| 81 | and a link to the full story. The description may be a brief summary | 81 | and a link to the full story. The description may be a brief summary |
| 82 | in plain text or a full HTML-formatted article. A headline may carry | 82 | in plain text or a full HTML-formatted article. A headline may carry |
| 83 | enclosed data such as images, audio or video files, typically in the | 83 | enclosed data such as images, audio or video files, typically in the |
| 84 | case of so ``podcast feeds''. | 84 | case of so ``podcast feeds''. |
| @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ customized to your liking. | |||
| 95 | As Newsticker is part of GNU Emacs there is no need to perform any | 95 | As Newsticker is part of GNU Emacs there is no need to perform any |
| 96 | installation steps in order to use it. | 96 | installation steps in order to use it. |
| 97 | 97 | ||
| 98 | Newsticker is highly customizable. All options have reasonable default | 98 | Newsticker is highly customizable. All options have reasonable default |
| 99 | values, so that (in most cases) it is not necessary to customize | 99 | values, so that (in most cases) it is not necessary to customize |
| 100 | anything before you start Newsticker for the first time. | 100 | anything before you start Newsticker for the first time. |
| 101 | 101 | ||
| @@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ it is retrieved a second time. | |||
| 186 | @chapter Reading News | 186 | @chapter Reading News |
| 187 | 187 | ||
| 188 | @findex newsticker-show-news | 188 | @findex newsticker-show-news |
| 189 | Start Newsticker with the command @kbd{M-x newsticker-show-news}. This | 189 | Start Newsticker with the command @kbd{M-x newsticker-show-news}. This |
| 190 | will start the asynchronous news download and displays all available | 190 | will start the asynchronous news download and displays all available |
| 191 | headlines. | 191 | headlines. |
| 192 | 192 | ||
| @@ -224,13 +224,13 @@ subtree. The following commands allow for managing groups. | |||
| 224 | @item M-a | 224 | @item M-a |
| 225 | @kindex M-a | 225 | @kindex M-a |
| 226 | @findex newsticker-group-add-group | 226 | @findex newsticker-group-add-group |
| 227 | Add a new feed group. Name of the new group and of the parent group | 227 | Add a new feed group. Name of the new group and of the parent group |
| 228 | must be entered. If The name of the parent group is the new group | 228 | must be entered. If The name of the parent group is the new group |
| 229 | becomes a top-level group. (@code{newsticker-group-add-group}) | 229 | becomes a top-level group. (@code{newsticker-group-add-group}) |
| 230 | @item M-m | 230 | @item M-m |
| 231 | @kindex M-m | 231 | @kindex M-m |
| 232 | @findex newsticker-group-move-feed | 232 | @findex newsticker-group-move-feed |
| 233 | Moves a feed into a group. The name of the group must be | 233 | Moves a feed into a group. The name of the group must be |
| 234 | entered. (@code{newsticker-group-move-feed}) | 234 | entered. (@code{newsticker-group-move-feed}) |
| 235 | @end table | 235 | @end table |
| 236 | 236 | ||
| @@ -269,18 +269,18 @@ The Treeview is updated automatically as soon as new headlines have | |||
| 269 | arrived. | 269 | arrived. |
| 270 | 270 | ||
| 271 | The Treeview is used when the variable @code{newsticker-frontend} is | 271 | The Treeview is used when the variable @code{newsticker-frontend} is |
| 272 | set to the value @code{newsticker-treeview}. (Alternatively it can be | 272 | set to the value @code{newsticker-treeview}. (Alternatively it can be |
| 273 | started with the command @code{newsticker-treeview}.) | 273 | started with the command @code{newsticker-treeview}.) |
| 274 | 274 | ||
| 275 | @subheading Plainview | 275 | @subheading Plainview |
| 276 | @cindex Plainview | 276 | @cindex Plainview |
| 277 | 277 | ||
| 278 | In this view all headlines of all feeds are displayed in a single | 278 | In this view all headlines of all feeds are displayed in a single |
| 279 | buffer (@file{*newsticker*}). The modeline in the @file{*newsticker*} | 279 | buffer (@file{*newsticker*}). The modeline in the @file{*newsticker*} |
| 280 | buffer informs you whenever new headlines have arrived. | 280 | buffer informs you whenever new headlines have arrived. |
| 281 | 281 | ||
| 282 | You may want to use imenu with Plainview, which allows for navigating | 282 | You may want to use imenu with Plainview, which allows for navigating |
| 283 | with the help of a menu. In this case add the following to your Emacs | 283 | with the help of a menu. In this case add the following to your Emacs |
| 284 | startup file (@file{~/.emacs}). | 284 | startup file (@file{~/.emacs}). |
| 285 | 285 | ||
| 286 | @lisp | 286 | @lisp |
| @@ -296,7 +296,7 @@ subscribed to a large amount of feeds you may want to give the | |||
| 296 | Treeview a try.) | 296 | Treeview a try.) |
| 297 | 297 | ||
| 298 | The Plainview is used when the variable @code{newsticker-frontend} is | 298 | The Plainview is used when the variable @code{newsticker-frontend} is |
| 299 | set to the value @code{newsticker-plainview}. (Alternatively it can be | 299 | set to the value @code{newsticker-plainview}. (Alternatively it can be |
| 300 | started with the command @code{newsticker-plainview}.) | 300 | started with the command @code{newsticker-plainview}.) |
| 301 | 301 | ||
| 302 | @subheading Ticker | 302 | @subheading Ticker |
diff --git a/doc/misc/nxml-mode.texi b/doc/misc/nxml-mode.texi index 90a8858fcbf..f01dc437d99 100644 --- a/doc/misc/nxml-mode.texi +++ b/doc/misc/nxml-mode.texi | |||
| @@ -134,8 +134,8 @@ type @kbd{C-M-i} or @kbd{@key{ESC} @key{TAB}} for completion, or bind | |||
| 134 | the following, I will assume that you type @kbd{C-M-i}. | 134 | the following, I will assume that you type @kbd{C-M-i}. |
| 135 | 135 | ||
| 136 | nXML mode completion works by examining the symbol preceding point. | 136 | nXML mode completion works by examining the symbol preceding point. |
| 137 | This is the symbol to be completed. The symbol to be completed may be | 137 | This is the symbol to be completed. The symbol to be completed may be |
| 138 | the empty. Completion considers what symbols starting with the symbol | 138 | the empty. Completion considers what symbols starting with the symbol |
| 139 | to be completed would be valid replacements for the symbol to be | 139 | to be completed would be valid replacements for the symbol to be |
| 140 | completed, given the schema and the contents of the buffer before | 140 | completed, given the schema and the contents of the buffer before |
| 141 | point. These symbols are the possible completions. An example may | 141 | point. These symbols are the possible completions. An example may |
| @@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ happens. | |||
| 182 | @item | 182 | @item |
| 183 | If there is one possible completion, then that completion is | 183 | If there is one possible completion, then that completion is |
| 184 | inserted, together with any following characters that are | 184 | inserted, together with any following characters that are |
| 185 | required. For example, in this case: | 185 | required. For example, in this case: |
| 186 | 186 | ||
| 187 | @example | 187 | @example |
| 188 | <html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> | 188 | <html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> |
| @@ -199,14 +199,14 @@ required. For example, in this case: | |||
| 199 | @item | 199 | @item |
| 200 | If there is more than one possible completion, but all | 200 | If there is more than one possible completion, but all |
| 201 | possible completions share a common non-empty prefix, then that prefix | 201 | possible completions share a common non-empty prefix, then that prefix |
| 202 | is inserted. For example, suppose the buffer is: | 202 | is inserted. For example, suppose the buffer is: |
| 203 | 203 | ||
| 204 | @example | 204 | @example |
| 205 | <html x@point{} | 205 | <html x@point{} |
| 206 | @end example | 206 | @end example |
| 207 | 207 | ||
| 208 | @noindent | 208 | @noindent |
| 209 | The symbol to be completed is @samp{x}. The possible completions are | 209 | The symbol to be completed is @samp{x}. The possible completions are |
| 210 | @samp{xmlns} and @samp{xml:lang}. These share a common prefix of | 210 | @samp{xmlns} and @samp{xml:lang}. These share a common prefix of |
| 211 | @samp{xml}. Thus, @kbd{C-M-i} will yield: | 211 | @samp{xml}. Thus, @kbd{C-M-i} will yield: |
| 212 | 212 | ||
| @@ -255,7 +255,7 @@ If you input @kbd{xmlns}, the result will be: | |||
| 255 | 255 | ||
| 256 | @noindent | 256 | @noindent |
| 257 | (If you do @kbd{C-M-i} again, the namespace URI will be | 257 | (If you do @kbd{C-M-i} again, the namespace URI will be |
| 258 | inserted. Should that happen automatically?) | 258 | inserted. Should that happen automatically?) |
| 259 | @end itemize | 259 | @end itemize |
| 260 | 260 | ||
| 261 | @node Inserting end-tags | 261 | @node Inserting end-tags |
| @@ -269,17 +269,17 @@ You can use @kbd{C-M-i} after @samp{</} to complete the rest of the | |||
| 269 | end-tag. | 269 | end-tag. |
| 270 | 270 | ||
| 271 | @kbd{C-c C-f} inserts an end-tag for the element containing | 271 | @kbd{C-c C-f} inserts an end-tag for the element containing |
| 272 | point. This command is useful when you want to input the start-tag, | 272 | point. This command is useful when you want to input the start-tag, |
| 273 | then input the content and finally input the end-tag. The @samp{f} | 273 | then input the content and finally input the end-tag. The @samp{f} |
| 274 | is mnemonic for finish. | 274 | is mnemonic for finish. |
| 275 | 275 | ||
| 276 | If you want to keep tags balanced and input the end-tag at the | 276 | If you want to keep tags balanced and input the end-tag at the |
| 277 | same time as the start-tag, before inputting the content, then you can | 277 | same time as the start-tag, before inputting the content, then you can |
| 278 | use @kbd{C-c C-i}. This inserts a @samp{>}, then inserts | 278 | use @kbd{C-c C-i}. This inserts a @samp{>}, then inserts |
| 279 | the end-tag and leaves point before the end-tag. @kbd{C-c C-b} | 279 | the end-tag and leaves point before the end-tag. @kbd{C-c C-b} |
| 280 | is similar but more convenient for block-level elements: it puts the | 280 | is similar but more convenient for block-level elements: it puts the |
| 281 | start-tag, point and the end-tag on successive lines, appropriately | 281 | start-tag, point and the end-tag on successive lines, appropriately |
| 282 | indented. The @samp{i} is mnemonic for inline and the | 282 | indented. The @samp{i} is mnemonic for inline and the |
| 283 | @samp{b} is mnemonic for block. | 283 | @samp{b} is mnemonic for block. |
| 284 | 284 | ||
| 285 | Finally, you can customize nXML mode so that @kbd{/} automatically | 285 | Finally, you can customize nXML mode so that @kbd{/} automatically |
| @@ -312,7 +312,7 @@ then those lines will not be included in any paragraph. | |||
| 312 | 312 | ||
| 313 | A start-tag at the beginning of the line (possibly indented) may | 313 | A start-tag at the beginning of the line (possibly indented) may |
| 314 | be treated as starting a paragraph. Similarly, an end-tag at the end | 314 | be treated as starting a paragraph. Similarly, an end-tag at the end |
| 315 | of the line may be treated as ending a paragraph. The following rules | 315 | of the line may be treated as ending a paragraph. The following rules |
| 316 | are used to determine whether such a tag is in fact treated as a | 316 | are used to determine whether such a tag is in fact treated as a |
| 317 | paragraph boundary: | 317 | paragraph boundary: |
| 318 | 318 | ||
| @@ -324,7 +324,7 @@ is a paragraph boundary. | |||
| 324 | If the end-tag corresponding to the start-tag is not at | 324 | If the end-tag corresponding to the start-tag is not at |
| 325 | the end of its line, or the start-tag corresponding to the end-tag is | 325 | the end of its line, or the start-tag corresponding to the end-tag is |
| 326 | not at the beginning of its line, then it is not a paragraph | 326 | not at the beginning of its line, then it is not a paragraph |
| 327 | boundary. For example, in | 327 | boundary. For example, in |
| 328 | 328 | ||
| 329 | @example | 329 | @example |
| 330 | <p>This is a paragraph with an | 330 | <p>This is a paragraph with an |
| @@ -374,9 +374,9 @@ in a future version. | |||
| 374 | 374 | ||
| 375 | The variable @code{nxml-section-element-name-regexp} gives | 375 | The variable @code{nxml-section-element-name-regexp} gives |
| 376 | a regexp for the local names (i.e., the part of the name following any | 376 | a regexp for the local names (i.e., the part of the name following any |
| 377 | prefix) of section elements. The variable | 377 | prefix) of section elements. The variable |
| 378 | @code{nxml-heading-element-name-regexp} gives a regexp for the | 378 | @code{nxml-heading-element-name-regexp} gives a regexp for the |
| 379 | local names of heading elements. For an element to be recognized | 379 | local names of heading elements. For an element to be recognized |
| 380 | as a section | 380 | as a section |
| 381 | 381 | ||
| 382 | @itemize @bullet | 382 | @itemize @bullet |
| @@ -415,7 +415,7 @@ that subsection. | |||
| 415 | @end itemize | 415 | @end itemize |
| 416 | 416 | ||
| 417 | In the last two states, where the text content is hidden, the | 417 | In the last two states, where the text content is hidden, the |
| 418 | heading is displayed specially, in an abbreviated form. An element | 418 | heading is displayed specially, in an abbreviated form. An element |
| 419 | like this: | 419 | like this: |
| 420 | 420 | ||
| 421 | @example | 421 | @example |
| @@ -515,7 +515,7 @@ displayed start-tag toggles the display of subheadings on and | |||
| 515 | off. | 515 | off. |
| 516 | 516 | ||
| 517 | The outline state for each section is stored with the first | 517 | The outline state for each section is stored with the first |
| 518 | character of the section (as a text property). Every command that | 518 | character of the section (as a text property). Every command that |
| 519 | changes the outline state of any section updates the display of the | 519 | changes the outline state of any section updates the display of the |
| 520 | buffer so that each section is displayed correctly according to its | 520 | buffer so that each section is displayed correctly according to its |
| 521 | outline state. If the section structure is subsequently changed, then | 521 | outline state. If the section structure is subsequently changed, then |
| @@ -536,10 +536,10 @@ should use. The order of the list is significant: when file | |||
| 536 | @var{x} occurs in the list before file @var{y} then rules | 536 | @var{x} occurs in the list before file @var{y} then rules |
| 537 | from file @var{x} have precedence over rules from file | 537 | from file @var{x} have precedence over rules from file |
| 538 | @var{y}. A filename specified in | 538 | @var{y}. A filename specified in |
| 539 | @samp{rng-schema-locating-files} may be relative. If so, it will | 539 | @samp{rng-schema-locating-files} may be relative. If so, it will |
| 540 | be resolved relative to the document for which a schema is being | 540 | be resolved relative to the document for which a schema is being |
| 541 | located. It is not an error if relative file-names in | 541 | located. It is not an error if relative file-names in |
| 542 | @samp{rng-schema-locating-files} do not exist. You can use | 542 | @samp{rng-schema-locating-files} do not exist. You can use |
| 543 | @kbd{M-x customize-variable @key{RET} rng-schema-locating-files | 543 | @kbd{M-x customize-variable @key{RET} rng-schema-locating-files |
| 544 | @key{RET}} to customize the list of schema locating | 544 | @key{RET}} to customize the list of schema locating |
| 545 | files. | 545 | files. |
| @@ -548,7 +548,7 @@ By default, @samp{rng-schema-locating-files} list has two | |||
| 548 | members: @samp{schemas.xml}, and | 548 | members: @samp{schemas.xml}, and |
| 549 | @samp{@var{dist-dir}/schema/schemas.xml} where | 549 | @samp{@var{dist-dir}/schema/schemas.xml} where |
| 550 | @samp{@var{dist-dir}} is the directory containing the nXML | 550 | @samp{@var{dist-dir}} is the directory containing the nXML |
| 551 | distribution. The first member will cause nXML mode to use a file | 551 | distribution. The first member will cause nXML mode to use a file |
| 552 | @samp{schemas.xml} in the same directory as the document being | 552 | @samp{schemas.xml} in the same directory as the document being |
| 553 | edited if such a file exist. The second member contains rules for the | 553 | edited if such a file exist. The second member contains rules for the |
| 554 | schemas that are included with the nXML distribution. | 554 | schemas that are included with the nXML distribution. |
| @@ -565,7 +565,7 @@ The command @kbd{C-c C-s C-w} will tell you what schema | |||
| 565 | is currently being used. | 565 | is currently being used. |
| 566 | 566 | ||
| 567 | The rules for locating a schema are applied automatically when | 567 | The rules for locating a schema are applied automatically when |
| 568 | you visit a file in nXML mode. However, if you have just created a new | 568 | you visit a file in nXML mode. However, if you have just created a new |
| 569 | file and the schema cannot be inferred from the file-name, then this | 569 | file and the schema cannot be inferred from the file-name, then this |
| 570 | will not locate the right schema. In this case, you should insert the | 570 | will not locate the right schema. In this case, you should insert the |
| 571 | start-tag of the root element and then use the command @kbd{C-c C-s | 571 | start-tag of the root element and then use the command @kbd{C-c C-s |
| @@ -578,12 +578,12 @@ If you want to use a schema that has not yet been added to the | |||
| 578 | schema locating files, you can use the command @kbd{C-c C-s C-f} | 578 | schema locating files, you can use the command @kbd{C-c C-s C-f} |
| 579 | to manually select the file containing the schema for the document in | 579 | to manually select the file containing the schema for the document in |
| 580 | current buffer. Emacs will read the file-name of the schema from the | 580 | current buffer. Emacs will read the file-name of the schema from the |
| 581 | minibuffer. After reading the file-name, Emacs will ask whether you | 581 | minibuffer. After reading the file-name, Emacs will ask whether you |
| 582 | wish to add a rule to a schema locating file that persistently | 582 | wish to add a rule to a schema locating file that persistently |
| 583 | associates the document with the selected schema. The rule will be | 583 | associates the document with the selected schema. The rule will be |
| 584 | added to the first file in the list specified | 584 | added to the first file in the list specified |
| 585 | @samp{rng-schema-locating-files}; it will create the file if | 585 | @samp{rng-schema-locating-files}; it will create the file if |
| 586 | necessary, but will not create a directory. If the variable | 586 | necessary, but will not create a directory. If the variable |
| 587 | @samp{rng-schema-locating-files} has not been customized, this | 587 | @samp{rng-schema-locating-files} has not been customized, this |
| 588 | means that the rule will be added to the file @samp{schemas.xml} | 588 | means that the rule will be added to the file @samp{schemas.xml} |
| 589 | in the same directory as the document being edited. | 589 | in the same directory as the document being edited. |
| @@ -591,14 +591,14 @@ in the same directory as the document being edited. | |||
| 591 | The command @kbd{C-c C-s C-t} allows you to select a schema by | 591 | The command @kbd{C-c C-s C-t} allows you to select a schema by |
| 592 | specifying an identifier for the type of the document. The schema | 592 | specifying an identifier for the type of the document. The schema |
| 593 | locating files determine the available type identifiers and what | 593 | locating files determine the available type identifiers and what |
| 594 | schema is used for each type identifier. This is useful when it is | 594 | schema is used for each type identifier. This is useful when it is |
| 595 | impossible to infer the right schema from either the file-name or the | 595 | impossible to infer the right schema from either the file-name or the |
| 596 | content of the document, even though the schema is already in the | 596 | content of the document, even though the schema is already in the |
| 597 | schema locating file. A situation in which this can occur is when | 597 | schema locating file. A situation in which this can occur is when |
| 598 | there are multiple variants of a schema where all valid documents have | 598 | there are multiple variants of a schema where all valid documents have |
| 599 | the same document element. For example, XHTML has Strict and | 599 | the same document element. For example, XHTML has Strict and |
| 600 | Transitional variants. In a situation like this, a schema locating file | 600 | Transitional variants. In a situation like this, a schema locating file |
| 601 | can define a type identifier for each variant. As with @kbd{C-c | 601 | can define a type identifier for each variant. As with @kbd{C-c |
| 602 | C-s C-f}, Emacs will ask whether you wish to add a rule to a schema | 602 | C-s C-f}, Emacs will ask whether you wish to add a rule to a schema |
| 603 | locating file that persistently associates the document with the | 603 | locating file that persistently associates the document with the |
| 604 | specified type identifier. | 604 | specified type identifier. |
| @@ -611,12 +611,12 @@ the schema that is currently being used. | |||
| 611 | @section Schema locating files | 611 | @section Schema locating files |
| 612 | 612 | ||
| 613 | Each schema locating file specifies a list of rules. The rules | 613 | Each schema locating file specifies a list of rules. The rules |
| 614 | from each file are appended in order. To locate a schema each rule is | 614 | from each file are appended in order. To locate a schema each rule is |
| 615 | applied in turn until a rule matches. The first matching rule is then | 615 | applied in turn until a rule matches. The first matching rule is then |
| 616 | used to determine the schema. | 616 | used to determine the schema. |
| 617 | 617 | ||
| 618 | Schema locating files are designed to be useful for other | 618 | Schema locating files are designed to be useful for other |
| 619 | applications that need to locate a schema for a document. In fact, | 619 | applications that need to locate a schema for a document. In fact, |
| 620 | there is nothing specific to locating schemas in the design; it could | 620 | there is nothing specific to locating schemas in the design; it could |
| 621 | equally well be used for locating a stylesheet. | 621 | equally well be used for locating a stylesheet. |
| 622 | 622 | ||
| @@ -638,7 +638,7 @@ files must be valid with respect to this schema. | |||
| 638 | The document element of a schema locating file must be | 638 | The document element of a schema locating file must be |
| 639 | @samp{locatingRules} and the namespace URI must be | 639 | @samp{locatingRules} and the namespace URI must be |
| 640 | @samp{http://thaiopensource.com/ns/locating-rules/1.0}. The | 640 | @samp{http://thaiopensource.com/ns/locating-rules/1.0}. The |
| 641 | children of the document element specify rules. The order of the | 641 | children of the document element specify rules. The order of the |
| 642 | children is the same as the order of the rules. Here's a complete | 642 | children is the same as the order of the rules. Here's a complete |
| 643 | example of a schema locating file: | 643 | example of a schema locating file: |
| 644 | 644 | ||
| @@ -665,7 +665,7 @@ As usual with XML-related technologies, resources are identified | |||
| 665 | by URIs. The @samp{uri} attribute identifies the schema by | 665 | by URIs. The @samp{uri} attribute identifies the schema by |
| 666 | specifying the URI@. The URI may be relative. If so, it is resolved | 666 | specifying the URI@. The URI may be relative. If so, it is resolved |
| 667 | relative to the URI of the schema locating file that contains | 667 | relative to the URI of the schema locating file that contains |
| 668 | attribute. This means that if the value of @samp{uri} attribute | 668 | attribute. This means that if the value of @samp{uri} attribute |
| 669 | does not contain a @samp{/}, then it will refer to a filename in | 669 | does not contain a @samp{/}, then it will refer to a filename in |
| 670 | the same directory as the schema locating file. | 670 | the same directory as the schema locating file. |
| 671 | 671 | ||
| @@ -696,7 +696,7 @@ relative URI in the @samp{resource} attribute is resolved into a | |||
| 696 | particular absolute URI using the base URI of the schema locating | 696 | particular absolute URI using the base URI of the schema locating |
| 697 | file, a relative URI pattern matches if it matches some number of | 697 | file, a relative URI pattern matches if it matches some number of |
| 698 | complete path segments of the document's URI ending with the last path | 698 | complete path segments of the document's URI ending with the last path |
| 699 | segment of the document's URI@. For example, | 699 | segment of the document's URI@. For example, |
| 700 | 700 | ||
| 701 | @example | 701 | @example |
| 702 | <uri pattern="*.xsl" uri="xslt.rnc"/> | 702 | <uri pattern="*.xsl" uri="xslt.rnc"/> |
| @@ -707,7 +707,7 @@ specifies that the schema for documents with a URI whose path ends | |||
| 707 | with @samp{.xsl} is @samp{xslt.rnc}. | 707 | with @samp{.xsl} is @samp{xslt.rnc}. |
| 708 | 708 | ||
| 709 | A @samp{transformURI} rule locates a schema by | 709 | A @samp{transformURI} rule locates a schema by |
| 710 | transforming the URI of the document. The @samp{fromPattern} | 710 | transforming the URI of the document. The @samp{fromPattern} |
| 711 | attribute specifies a URI pattern with the same meaning as the | 711 | attribute specifies a URI pattern with the same meaning as the |
| 712 | @samp{pattern} attribute of the @samp{uri} element. The | 712 | @samp{pattern} attribute of the @samp{uri} element. The |
| 713 | @samp{toPattern} attribute is a URI pattern that is used to | 713 | @samp{toPattern} attribute is a URI pattern that is used to |
| @@ -736,7 +736,7 @@ schema. | |||
| 736 | @subsection Using the document element to locate a schema | 736 | @subsection Using the document element to locate a schema |
| 737 | 737 | ||
| 738 | A @samp{documentElement} rule locates a schema based on | 738 | A @samp{documentElement} rule locates a schema based on |
| 739 | the local name and prefix of the document element. For example, a rule | 739 | the local name and prefix of the document element. For example, a rule |
| 740 | 740 | ||
| 741 | @example | 741 | @example |
| 742 | <documentElement prefix="xsl" localName="stylesheet" uri="xslt.rnc"/> | 742 | <documentElement prefix="xsl" localName="stylesheet" uri="xslt.rnc"/> |
| @@ -745,12 +745,12 @@ the local name and prefix of the document element. For example, a rule | |||
| 745 | @noindent | 745 | @noindent |
| 746 | specifies that when the name of the document element is | 746 | specifies that when the name of the document element is |
| 747 | @samp{xsl:stylesheet}, then @samp{xslt.rnc} should be used | 747 | @samp{xsl:stylesheet}, then @samp{xslt.rnc} should be used |
| 748 | as the schema. Either the @samp{prefix} or | 748 | as the schema. Either the @samp{prefix} or |
| 749 | @samp{localName} attribute may be omitted to allow any prefix or | 749 | @samp{localName} attribute may be omitted to allow any prefix or |
| 750 | local name. | 750 | local name. |
| 751 | 751 | ||
| 752 | A @samp{namespace} rule locates a schema based on the | 752 | A @samp{namespace} rule locates a schema based on the |
| 753 | namespace URI of the document element. For example, a rule | 753 | namespace URI of the document element. For example, a rule |
| 754 | 754 | ||
| 755 | @example | 755 | @example |
| 756 | <namespace ns="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform" uri="xslt.rnc"/> | 756 | <namespace ns="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform" uri="xslt.rnc"/> |
| @@ -780,7 +780,7 @@ Each of the rules described in previous sections that uses a | |||
| 780 | @samp{uri} attribute to specify a schema, can instead use a | 780 | @samp{uri} attribute to specify a schema, can instead use a |
| 781 | @samp{typeId} attribute to specify a type identifier. The type | 781 | @samp{typeId} attribute to specify a type identifier. The type |
| 782 | identifier can be associated with a URI using a @samp{typeId} | 782 | identifier can be associated with a URI using a @samp{typeId} |
| 783 | element. For example, | 783 | element. For example, |
| 784 | 784 | ||
| 785 | @example | 785 | @example |
| 786 | <locatingRules xmlns="http://thaiopensource.com/ns/locating-rules/1.0"> | 786 | <locatingRules xmlns="http://thaiopensource.com/ns/locating-rules/1.0"> |
| @@ -805,7 +805,7 @@ more flexible than a schema locating file that simply specified | |||
| 805 | 805 | ||
| 806 | @noindent | 806 | @noindent |
| 807 | A user can easily use @kbd{C-c C-s C-t} to select between XHTML | 807 | A user can easily use @kbd{C-c C-s C-t} to select between XHTML |
| 808 | Strict and XHTML Transitional. Also, a user can easily add a catalog | 808 | Strict and XHTML Transitional. Also, a user can easily add a catalog |
| 809 | 809 | ||
| 810 | @example | 810 | @example |
| 811 | <locatingRules xmlns="http://thaiopensource.com/ns/locating-rules/1.0"> | 811 | <locatingRules xmlns="http://thaiopensource.com/ns/locating-rules/1.0"> |
| @@ -823,7 +823,7 @@ The @samp{include} element includes rules from another | |||
| 823 | schema locating file. The behavior is exactly as if the rules from | 823 | schema locating file. The behavior is exactly as if the rules from |
| 824 | that file were included in place of the @samp{include} element. | 824 | that file were included in place of the @samp{include} element. |
| 825 | Relative URIs are resolved into absolute URIs before the inclusion is | 825 | Relative URIs are resolved into absolute URIs before the inclusion is |
| 826 | performed. For example, | 826 | performed. For example, |
| 827 | 827 | ||
| 828 | @example | 828 | @example |
| 829 | <include rules="../rules.xml"/> | 829 | <include rules="../rules.xml"/> |
| @@ -875,7 +875,7 @@ nXML mode is designed to support the creation of standalone XML | |||
| 875 | documents that do not depend on a DTD@. Although it is common practice | 875 | documents that do not depend on a DTD@. Although it is common practice |
| 876 | to insert a DOCTYPE declaration referencing an external DTD, this has | 876 | to insert a DOCTYPE declaration referencing an external DTD, this has |
| 877 | undesirable side-effects. It means that the document is no longer | 877 | undesirable side-effects. It means that the document is no longer |
| 878 | self-contained. It also means that different XML parsers may interpret | 878 | self-contained. It also means that different XML parsers may interpret |
| 879 | the document in different ways, since the XML Recommendation does not | 879 | the document in different ways, since the XML Recommendation does not |
| 880 | require XML parsers to read the DTD@. With DTDs, it was impractical to | 880 | require XML parsers to read the DTD@. With DTDs, it was impractical to |
| 881 | get validation without using an external DTD or reference to an | 881 | get validation without using an external DTD or reference to an |
| @@ -884,9 +884,9 @@ simultaneously get the benefits of validation and standalone XML | |||
| 884 | documents. Therefore, I recommend that you do not reference an | 884 | documents. Therefore, I recommend that you do not reference an |
| 885 | external DOCTYPE in your XML documents. | 885 | external DOCTYPE in your XML documents. |
| 886 | 886 | ||
| 887 | One problem is entities for characters. Typically, as well as | 887 | One problem is entities for characters. Typically, as well as |
| 888 | providing validation, DTDs also provide a set of character entities | 888 | providing validation, DTDs also provide a set of character entities |
| 889 | for documents to use. Schemas cannot provide this functionality, | 889 | for documents to use. Schemas cannot provide this functionality, |
| 890 | because schema validation happens after XML parsing. The recommended | 890 | because schema validation happens after XML parsing. The recommended |
| 891 | solution is to either use the Unicode characters directly, or, if this | 891 | solution is to either use the Unicode characters directly, or, if this |
| 892 | is impractical, use character references. nXML mode supports this by | 892 | is impractical, use character references. nXML mode supports this by |
| @@ -903,7 +903,7 @@ nXML mode has some limitations: | |||
| 903 | @item | 903 | @item |
| 904 | DTD support is limited. Internal parsed general entities declared | 904 | DTD support is limited. Internal parsed general entities declared |
| 905 | in the internal subset are supported provided they do not contain | 905 | in the internal subset are supported provided they do not contain |
| 906 | elements. Other usage of DTDs is ignored. | 906 | elements. Other usage of DTDs is ignored. |
| 907 | @item | 907 | @item |
| 908 | The restrictions on RELAX NG schemas in section 7 of the RELAX NG | 908 | The restrictions on RELAX NG schemas in section 7 of the RELAX NG |
| 909 | specification are not enforced. | 909 | specification are not enforced. |
diff --git a/doc/misc/org.org b/doc/misc/org.org index 83a723ea94f..dc7d8ef166f 100644 --- a/doc/misc/org.org +++ b/doc/misc/org.org | |||
| @@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ Authoring Org files is best supported by Emacs, but you can view, | |||
| 27 | understand, and change them with any text editor. | 27 | understand, and change them with any text editor. |
| 28 | 28 | ||
| 29 | As an authoring tool, Org helps you write structured documents and | 29 | As an authoring tool, Org helps you write structured documents and |
| 30 | provides exporting facilities. Org files can also be used for literate | 30 | provides exporting facilities. Org files can also be used for literate |
| 31 | programming and reproducible research. As a TODO lists manager, Org | 31 | programming and reproducible research. As a TODO lists manager, Org |
| 32 | helps you organize your tasks in a flexible way, from daily needs to | 32 | helps you organize your tasks in a flexible way, from daily needs to |
| 33 | detailed project-planning, allowing logging, multiple views on your | 33 | detailed project-planning, allowing logging, multiple views on your |
| @@ -16552,7 +16552,7 @@ BACKEND is the export backend being used, as a symbol." | |||
| 16552 | (lambda () | 16552 | (lambda () |
| 16553 | (delete-region (point) (line-beginning-position 2)) | 16553 | (delete-region (point) (line-beginning-position 2)) |
| 16554 | ;; We need to tell `org-map-entries' to not skip over heading at | 16554 | ;; We need to tell `org-map-entries' to not skip over heading at |
| 16555 | ;; point. Otherwise, it would continue from _next_ heading. See | 16555 | ;; point. Otherwise, it would continue from _next_ heading. See |
| 16556 | ;; the docstring of `org-map-entries' for details. | 16556 | ;; the docstring of `org-map-entries' for details. |
| 16557 | (setq org-map-continue-from (point))))) | 16557 | (setq org-map-continue-from (point))))) |
| 16558 | 16558 | ||
| @@ -17661,7 +17661,7 @@ Org currently includes the following export processors: | |||
| 17661 | - bibtex :: this export processor uses BibTeX, the historical | 17661 | - bibtex :: this export processor uses BibTeX, the historical |
| 17662 | bibliographic processor used with LaTeX, thus allowing the use of | 17662 | bibliographic processor used with LaTeX, thus allowing the use of |
| 17663 | data and style files compatible with this processor (including a | 17663 | data and style files compatible with this processor (including a |
| 17664 | large number of publishers' styles). It only supports LaTeX's | 17664 | large number of publishers' styles). It only supports LaTeX's |
| 17665 | =\cite= and =\nocite= commands. | 17665 | =\cite= and =\nocite= commands. |
| 17666 | 17666 | ||
| 17667 | - natbib :: as with the bibtex processor, but using the LaTeX | 17667 | - natbib :: as with the bibtex processor, but using the LaTeX |
| @@ -17706,15 +17706,15 @@ your LaTeX installation, it won't export to anything but PDF. | |||
| 17706 | #+vindex: org-cite-biblatex-options | 17706 | #+vindex: org-cite-biblatex-options |
| 17707 | #+texinfo: @noindent | 17707 | #+texinfo: @noindent |
| 17708 | specifies the =biblatex= export processor with the default =numeric= | 17708 | specifies the =biblatex= export processor with the default =numeric= |
| 17709 | style and the =bibtex= backend. Always define the style first and then | 17709 | style and the =bibtex= backend. Always define the style first and then |
| 17710 | the rest of load-time options for the =biblatex= | 17710 | the rest of load-time options for the =biblatex= |
| 17711 | package. Alternatively, you can use the ~key=val,key=val~ format for | 17711 | package. Alternatively, you can use the ~key=val,key=val~ format for |
| 17712 | the options as documented in the =biblatex= package documentation: | 17712 | the options as documented in the =biblatex= package documentation: |
| 17713 | 17713 | ||
| 17714 | : #+cite_export: biblatex backend=bibtex,style=numeric | 17714 | : #+cite_export: biblatex backend=bibtex,style=numeric |
| 17715 | 17715 | ||
| 17716 | The ~org-cite-biblatex-options~ variable in your Emacs configuration | 17716 | The ~org-cite-biblatex-options~ variable in your Emacs configuration |
| 17717 | uses this format. It will only export to PDF, since it relies on the | 17717 | uses this format. It will only export to PDF, since it relies on the |
| 17718 | ~biblatex~ processor of your LaTeX installation. | 17718 | ~biblatex~ processor of your LaTeX installation. |
| 17719 | 17719 | ||
| 17720 | ** Bibliography printing | 17720 | ** Bibliography printing |
| @@ -19425,10 +19425,10 @@ the tangled file's executable permission. | |||
| 19425 | The =tangle-mode= header argument specifies what permissions to set | 19425 | The =tangle-mode= header argument specifies what permissions to set |
| 19426 | for tangled files by ~set-file-modes~. Permissions are given by an | 19426 | for tangled files by ~set-file-modes~. Permissions are given by an |
| 19427 | octal value, which can be provided calling the ~identity~ function on | 19427 | octal value, which can be provided calling the ~identity~ function on |
| 19428 | an elisp octal value. For instance, to create a read-only file one may | 19428 | an elisp octal value. For instance, to create a read-only file one may |
| 19429 | use =:tangle-mode (identity #o444)=. To reduce the verbosity required, | 19429 | use =:tangle-mode (identity #o444)=. To reduce the verbosity required, |
| 19430 | a octal shorthand is defined, =oXXX= (=o= for octal). Using this, our | 19430 | a octal shorthand is defined, =oXXX= (=o= for octal). Using this, our |
| 19431 | read-only example is =:tangle-mode o444=. Omitting the =o= prefix will | 19431 | read-only example is =:tangle-mode o444=. Omitting the =o= prefix will |
| 19432 | cause the argument to be interpreted as an integer, which can lead to | 19432 | cause the argument to be interpreted as an integer, which can lead to |
| 19433 | unexpected results (=444= is the same as =o674=). | 19433 | unexpected results (=444= is the same as =o674=). |
| 19434 | Two other shorthands are recognized, ls-style strings like | 19434 | Two other shorthands are recognized, ls-style strings like |
| @@ -19437,7 +19437,7 @@ Note that chmod-style permissions are based on | |||
| 19437 | ~org-babel-tangle-default-file-mode~, which is =#o544= by default. | 19437 | ~org-babel-tangle-default-file-mode~, which is =#o544= by default. |
| 19438 | 19438 | ||
| 19439 | When =:tangle-mode= and =:shebang= are both specified, the give | 19439 | When =:tangle-mode= and =:shebang= are both specified, the give |
| 19440 | =:tangle-mode= will override the permissions from =:shebang=. When | 19440 | =:tangle-mode= will override the permissions from =:shebang=. When |
| 19441 | multiple source code blocks tangle to a single file with conflicting | 19441 | multiple source code blocks tangle to a single file with conflicting |
| 19442 | =:tangle-mode= header arguments, Org's behavior is undefined. | 19442 | =:tangle-mode= header arguments, Org's behavior is undefined. |
| 19443 | 19443 | ||
diff --git a/doc/misc/pcl-cvs.texi b/doc/misc/pcl-cvs.texi index e1504b08a3a..6043685b2c8 100644 --- a/doc/misc/pcl-cvs.texi +++ b/doc/misc/pcl-cvs.texi | |||
| @@ -730,7 +730,7 @@ positioned on a directory all files in that directory are marked | |||
| 730 | (@code{cvs-mode-mark}). | 730 | (@code{cvs-mode-mark}). |
| 731 | 731 | ||
| 732 | @item u | 732 | @item u |
| 733 | Unmark the file that the cursor is positioned on. If the cursor is on a | 733 | Unmark the file that the cursor is positioned on. If the cursor is on a |
| 734 | directory, all files in that directory are unmarked | 734 | directory, all files in that directory are unmarked |
| 735 | (@code{cvs-mode-unmark}). | 735 | (@code{cvs-mode-unmark}). |
| 736 | 736 | ||
diff --git a/doc/misc/rcirc.texi b/doc/misc/rcirc.texi index 9ae4bb4a17c..98f60dcc60e 100644 --- a/doc/misc/rcirc.texi +++ b/doc/misc/rcirc.texi | |||
| @@ -835,7 +835,7 @@ window @code{rcirc} considers is controlled by the | |||
| 835 | 835 | ||
| 836 | @vindex rcirc-omit-unless-requested | 836 | @vindex rcirc-omit-unless-requested |
| 837 | Certain messages can be omitted by default, unless the user manual | 837 | Certain messages can be omitted by default, unless the user manual |
| 838 | requests them. For example, if you don't want to display @code{TOPIC} | 838 | requests them. For example, if you don't want to display @code{TOPIC} |
| 839 | and @code{NAMES} messages, after reconnecting, you can configure | 839 | and @code{NAMES} messages, after reconnecting, you can configure |
| 840 | @code{rcirc-omit-unless-requested} to hide: | 840 | @code{rcirc-omit-unless-requested} to hide: |
| 841 | 841 | ||
diff --git a/doc/misc/reftex.texi b/doc/misc/reftex.texi index 08ef084ae12..f542685b9f9 100644 --- a/doc/misc/reftex.texi +++ b/doc/misc/reftex.texi | |||
| @@ -1371,7 +1371,7 @@ the context. | |||
| 1371 | @end lisp | 1371 | @end lisp |
| 1372 | 1372 | ||
| 1373 | The empty pairs of brackets indicate the different arguments of the | 1373 | The empty pairs of brackets indicate the different arguments of the |
| 1374 | @code{\myfig} macro. The @samp{*} marks the label argument. @code{?f} | 1374 | @code{\myfig} macro. The @samp{*} marks the label argument. @code{?f} |
| 1375 | indicates that this is a figure label which will be listed together with | 1375 | indicates that this is a figure label which will be listed together with |
| 1376 | labels from normal figure environments. The @code{nil} entries for | 1376 | labels from normal figure environments. The @code{nil} entries for |
| 1377 | prefix and reference format mean to use the defaults for figure labels. | 1377 | prefix and reference format mean to use the defaults for figure labels. |
| @@ -1748,7 +1748,7 @@ selection process similar to that for selecting labels | |||
| 1748 | (@pxref{Referencing Labels}). | 1748 | (@pxref{Referencing Labels}). |
| 1749 | 1749 | ||
| 1750 | The regular expression uses an extended syntax: @samp{&&} defines a | 1750 | The regular expression uses an extended syntax: @samp{&&} defines a |
| 1751 | logic @code{and} for regular expressions. For example | 1751 | logic @code{and} for regular expressions. For example |
| 1752 | @samp{Einstein&&Bose} will match all articles which mention | 1752 | @samp{Einstein&&Bose} will match all articles which mention |
| 1753 | Bose-Einstein condensation, or which are co-authored by Bose and | 1753 | Bose-Einstein condensation, or which are co-authored by Bose and |
| 1754 | Einstein. When entering the regular expression, you can complete on | 1754 | Einstein. When entering the regular expression, you can complete on |
| @@ -2708,7 +2708,7 @@ display. | |||
| 2708 | 2708 | ||
| 2709 | @item @code{\bibitem} | 2709 | @item @code{\bibitem} |
| 2710 | @cindex @code{\bibitem} | 2710 | @cindex @code{\bibitem} |
| 2711 | Display a document location which cites this article. Pressing | 2711 | Display a document location which cites this article. Pressing |
| 2712 | @kbd{C-c &} several times moves through the entire document and finds | 2712 | @kbd{C-c &} several times moves through the entire document and finds |
| 2713 | all locations. | 2713 | all locations. |
| 2714 | 2714 | ||
| @@ -2955,7 +2955,7 @@ path specified in the variables @code{BIBINPUTS} and @code{TEXBIB} for | |||
| 2955 | When searching, @RefTeX{} will also expand recursive path | 2955 | When searching, @RefTeX{} will also expand recursive path |
| 2956 | definitions (directories ending in @samp{//} or @samp{!!}). But it will | 2956 | definitions (directories ending in @samp{//} or @samp{!!}). But it will |
| 2957 | only search and expand directories @emph{explicitly} given in these | 2957 | only search and expand directories @emph{explicitly} given in these |
| 2958 | variables. This may cause problems under the following circumstances: | 2958 | variables. This may cause problems under the following circumstances: |
| 2959 | 2959 | ||
| 2960 | @itemize @bullet | 2960 | @itemize @bullet |
| 2961 | @item | 2961 | @item |
| @@ -3288,7 +3288,7 @@ Labels}). | |||
| 3288 | @findex TeX-add-style-hook@r{, AUCTeX} | 3288 | @findex TeX-add-style-hook@r{, AUCTeX} |
| 3289 | Style files are Emacs Lisp files which are evaluated by @AUCTeX{} in | 3289 | Style files are Emacs Lisp files which are evaluated by @AUCTeX{} in |
| 3290 | association with the @code{\documentclass} and @code{\usepackage} | 3290 | association with the @code{\documentclass} and @code{\usepackage} |
| 3291 | commands of a document (@pxref{Style Files,,,auctex}). Support for | 3291 | commands of a document (@pxref{Style Files,,,auctex}). Support for |
| 3292 | @RefTeX{} in such a style file is useful when the @LaTeX{} style | 3292 | @RefTeX{} in such a style file is useful when the @LaTeX{} style |
| 3293 | defines macros or environments connected with labels, citations, or the | 3293 | defines macros or environments connected with labels, citations, or the |
| 3294 | index. Many style files (e.g., @file{amsmath.el} or @file{natbib.el}) | 3294 | index. Many style files (e.g., @file{amsmath.el} or @file{natbib.el}) |
| @@ -4132,7 +4132,7 @@ Prefixes for section labels. When the label prefix given in an entry in | |||
| 4132 | @code{reftex-label-alist} contains @samp{%S}, this list is used to | 4132 | @code{reftex-label-alist} contains @samp{%S}, this list is used to |
| 4133 | determine the correct prefix string depending on the current section | 4133 | determine the correct prefix string depending on the current section |
| 4134 | level. The list is an alist, with each entry of the form | 4134 | level. The list is an alist, with each entry of the form |
| 4135 | @w{@code{(@var{key} . @var{prefix})}}. Possible keys are sectioning macro | 4135 | @w{@code{(@var{key} . @var{prefix})}}. Possible keys are sectioning macro |
| 4136 | names like @samp{chapter}, integer section levels (as given in | 4136 | names like @samp{chapter}, integer section levels (as given in |
| 4137 | @code{reftex-section-levels}), and @code{t} for the default. | 4137 | @code{reftex-section-levels}), and @code{t} for the default. |
| 4138 | @end defopt | 4138 | @end defopt |
| @@ -4298,7 +4298,7 @@ Character class after abbrev point in word. | |||
| 4298 | @cindex Referencing labels, options | 4298 | @cindex Referencing labels, options |
| 4299 | 4299 | ||
| 4300 | @defopt reftex-label-menu-flags | 4300 | @defopt reftex-label-menu-flags |
| 4301 | List of flags governing the label menu makeup. The flags are: | 4301 | List of flags governing the label menu makeup. The flags are: |
| 4302 | @table @asis | 4302 | @table @asis |
| 4303 | @item @var{table-of-contents} | 4303 | @item @var{table-of-contents} |
| 4304 | Show the labels embedded in a table of context. | 4304 | Show the labels embedded in a table of context. |
| @@ -4764,7 +4764,7 @@ phrase and its index command will always end up on a single line. | |||
| 4764 | 4764 | ||
| 4765 | @defopt reftex-index-phrases-sort-prefers-entry | 4765 | @defopt reftex-index-phrases-sort-prefers-entry |
| 4766 | Non-@code{nil} means when sorting phrase lines, the explicit index entry | 4766 | Non-@code{nil} means when sorting phrase lines, the explicit index entry |
| 4767 | is used. Phrase lines in the phrases buffer contain a search phrase, and | 4767 | is used. Phrase lines in the phrases buffer contain a search phrase, and |
| 4768 | sorting is normally based on these. Some phrase lines also have | 4768 | sorting is normally based on these. Some phrase lines also have |
| 4769 | an explicit index argument specified. When this variable is | 4769 | an explicit index argument specified. When this variable is |
| 4770 | non-@code{nil}, the index argument will be used for sorting. | 4770 | non-@code{nil}, the index argument will be used for sorting. |
| @@ -4993,7 +4993,7 @@ lookup. | |||
| 4993 | @end table | 4993 | @end table |
| 4994 | 4994 | ||
| 4995 | If a buffer is to be kept, the file is visited normally (which is | 4995 | If a buffer is to be kept, the file is visited normally (which is |
| 4996 | potentially slow but will happen only once). If a buffer is to be thrown | 4996 | potentially slow but will happen only once). If a buffer is to be thrown |
| 4997 | away, the initialization of the buffer depends upon the variable | 4997 | away, the initialization of the buffer depends upon the variable |
| 4998 | @code{reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers}. | 4998 | @code{reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers}. |
| 4999 | @end defopt | 4999 | @end defopt |
| @@ -5001,7 +5001,7 @@ away, the initialization of the buffer depends upon the variable | |||
| 5001 | @defopt reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers | 5001 | @defopt reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers |
| 5002 | Non-@code{nil} means do initializations even when visiting file | 5002 | Non-@code{nil} means do initializations even when visiting file |
| 5003 | temporarily. When @code{nil}, @RefTeX{} may turn off find-file hooks and | 5003 | temporarily. When @code{nil}, @RefTeX{} may turn off find-file hooks and |
| 5004 | other stuff to briefly visit a file. When @code{t}, the full default | 5004 | other stuff to briefly visit a file. When @code{t}, the full default |
| 5005 | initializations are done (@code{find-file-hook} etc.). Instead of | 5005 | initializations are done (@code{find-file-hook} etc.). Instead of |
| 5006 | @code{t} or @code{nil}, this variable may also be a list of hook | 5006 | @code{t} or @code{nil}, this variable may also be a list of hook |
| 5007 | functions to do a minimal initialization. | 5007 | functions to do a minimal initialization. |
| @@ -5107,7 +5107,7 @@ Non-@code{nil} means, highlight selected text in selection and | |||
| 5107 | @emph{selected} text, and it is highlighted. This is the entry most | 5107 | @emph{selected} text, and it is highlighted. This is the entry most |
| 5108 | keys in the selection and @file{*toc*} buffers act on. However, if you | 5108 | keys in the selection and @file{*toc*} buffers act on. However, if you |
| 5109 | mainly use the mouse to select an item, you may find it nice to have | 5109 | mainly use the mouse to select an item, you may find it nice to have |
| 5110 | mouse-triggered highlighting @emph{instead} or @emph{as well}. The | 5110 | mouse-triggered highlighting @emph{instead} or @emph{as well}. The |
| 5111 | variable may have one of these values: | 5111 | variable may have one of these values: |
| 5112 | 5112 | ||
| 5113 | @example | 5113 | @example |
| @@ -5719,7 +5719,7 @@ Fixed bug with empty context strings. | |||
| 5719 | @noindent @b{Version 3.21} | 5719 | @noindent @b{Version 3.21} |
| 5720 | @itemize @bullet | 5720 | @itemize @bullet |
| 5721 | @item | 5721 | @item |
| 5722 | New options for all faces used by @RefTeX{}. They're in the | 5722 | New options for all faces used by @RefTeX{}. They're in the |
| 5723 | customization group @code{reftex-fontification-configurations}. | 5723 | customization group @code{reftex-fontification-configurations}. |
| 5724 | @end itemize | 5724 | @end itemize |
| 5725 | 5725 | ||
diff --git a/doc/misc/sc.texi b/doc/misc/sc.texi index 5176797cde8..ac256cb6eaf 100644 --- a/doc/misc/sc.texi +++ b/doc/misc/sc.texi | |||
| @@ -620,7 +620,7 @@ time, it just goes ahead and inserts the reference header indexed by | |||
| 620 | different reference headers based on the type of reply or forwarding | 620 | different reference headers based on the type of reply or forwarding |
| 621 | you are doing. You may also want to preview the reference header | 621 | you are doing. You may also want to preview the reference header |
| 622 | before deciding whether to insert it into the reply buffer or | 622 | before deciding whether to insert it into the reply buffer or |
| 623 | not. Supercite provides an optional @dfn{electric reference} mode | 623 | not. Supercite provides an optional @dfn{electric reference} mode |
| 624 | which you can drop into to give you this functionality. | 624 | which you can drop into to give you this functionality. |
| 625 | 625 | ||
| 626 | @vindex sc-electric-references-p | 626 | @vindex sc-electric-references-p |
diff --git a/doc/misc/ses.texi b/doc/misc/ses.texi index 80c7b93aa28..bb9516a3b2a 100644 --- a/doc/misc/ses.texi +++ b/doc/misc/ses.texi | |||
| @@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ A B | |||
| 162 | By default, the cell value print-out is right aligned, that is the | 162 | By default, the cell value print-out is right aligned, that is the |
| 163 | reason for such an alignment for the notes in column @samp{B}. To | 163 | reason for such an alignment for the notes in column @samp{B}. To |
| 164 | change that, you can enter a printer function for the whole column, | 164 | change that, you can enter a printer function for the whole column, |
| 165 | using e.g., @kbd{M-p ("%s")}. Enclosing @code{"%s"} into a list tells | 165 | using e.g., @kbd{M-p ("%s")}. Enclosing @code{"%s"} into a list tells |
| 166 | @acronym{SES} to align left. You can override a column's printer | 166 | @acronym{SES} to align left. You can override a column's printer |
| 167 | function in any individual cell using @kbd{p}. | 167 | function in any individual cell using @kbd{p}. |
| 168 | 168 | ||
| @@ -203,7 +203,7 @@ remove blank cells from the returned list, which enables using | |||
| 203 | 203 | ||
| 204 | Actually, both options are not exactly equivalent as the former makes | 204 | Actually, both options are not exactly equivalent as the former makes |
| 205 | the summing in reversed order of argument, and the latter in the same | 205 | the summing in reversed order of argument, and the latter in the same |
| 206 | order. You can also reverse the order of arguments returned by | 206 | order. You can also reverse the order of arguments returned by |
| 207 | @code{ses-range} with the @code{<} modifier. | 207 | @code{ses-range} with the @code{<} modifier. |
| 208 | 208 | ||
| 209 | @c =================================================================== | 209 | @c =================================================================== |
| @@ -226,16 +226,16 @@ with @file{.ses}. For example, @kbd{C-x C-f test.ses @key{RET}}. | |||
| 226 | A @dfn{cell identifier} is a symbol with a column letter and a row | 226 | A @dfn{cell identifier} is a symbol with a column letter and a row |
| 227 | number. Cell B7 is the 2nd column of the 7th row. For very wide | 227 | number. Cell B7 is the 2nd column of the 7th row. For very wide |
| 228 | spreadsheets, there are two column letters: cell AB7 is the 28th | 228 | spreadsheets, there are two column letters: cell AB7 is the 28th |
| 229 | column of the 7th row. Super wide spreadsheets get AAA1, etc. | 229 | column of the 7th row. Super wide spreadsheets get AAA1, etc. |
| 230 | You move around with the regular Emacs movement commands. | 230 | You move around with the regular Emacs movement commands. |
| 231 | 231 | ||
| 232 | @table @kbd | 232 | @table @kbd |
| 233 | @item j | 233 | @item j |
| 234 | Moves point to cell, specified by identifier (@code{ses-jump}). Unless | 234 | Moves point to cell, specified by identifier (@code{ses-jump}). Unless |
| 235 | the cell is a renamed cell, the identifier is case-insensitive. A | 235 | the cell is a renamed cell, the identifier is case-insensitive. A |
| 236 | prefix argument @math{n} move to cell with coordinates @math{(n\div R, | 236 | prefix argument @math{n} move to cell with coordinates @math{(n\div R, |
| 237 | n \% C)} for a spreadsheet of @math{R} rows and @math{C} columns, and | 237 | n \% C)} for a spreadsheet of @math{R} rows and @math{C} columns, and |
| 238 | @samp{A1} being of coordinates @math{(0,0)}. The way the identifier or | 238 | @samp{A1} being of coordinates @math{(0,0)}. The way the identifier or |
| 239 | the command prefix argument are interpreted can be customized through | 239 | the command prefix argument are interpreted can be customized through |
| 240 | variables @code{ses-jump-cell-name-function} and | 240 | variables @code{ses-jump-cell-name-function} and |
| 241 | @code{ses-jump-prefix-function}. | 241 | @code{ses-jump-prefix-function}. |
| @@ -434,7 +434,7 @@ use parentheses: @samp{("$%.2f")}. | |||
| 434 | @item | 434 | @item |
| 435 | A printer can also be a one-argument function, the result of which is | 435 | A printer can also be a one-argument function, the result of which is |
| 436 | a string (to get right alignment) or list of one string (to get left | 436 | a string (to get right alignment) or list of one string (to get left |
| 437 | alignment). Such a function can be in turn configured as: | 437 | alignment). Such a function can be in turn configured as: |
| 438 | @itemize | 438 | @itemize |
| 439 | @item | 439 | @item |
| 440 | A lambda expression, for instance: | 440 | A lambda expression, for instance: |
| @@ -543,11 +543,11 @@ printer function. Then, if you call again | |||
| 543 | reprinted accordingly. | 543 | reprinted accordingly. |
| 544 | 544 | ||
| 545 | Sometimes there are local printers that you want to define or | 545 | Sometimes there are local printers that you want to define or |
| 546 | re-define automatically every time you open a sheet. For instance | 546 | re-define automatically every time you open a sheet. For instance |
| 547 | imagine that you want to define/re-define automatically a local | 547 | imagine that you want to define/re-define automatically a local |
| 548 | printer @code{euro} to display a number like an amount of euros, that | 548 | printer @code{euro} to display a number like an amount of euros, that |
| 549 | is to say number @code{3.1} would be displayed as | 549 | is to say number @code{3.1} would be displayed as |
| 550 | @code{3.10@dmn{}@euro{}}. To do so in any non read-only SES buffer, | 550 | @code{3.10@dmn{}@euro{}}. To do so in any non read-only SES buffer, |
| 551 | you can add some code like this to your @file{.emacs} init file: | 551 | you can add some code like this to your @file{.emacs} init file: |
| 552 | 552 | ||
| 553 | @lisp | 553 | @lisp |
| @@ -586,7 +586,7 @@ when you define a local printer function with command | |||
| 586 | 586 | ||
| 587 | When doing so, please take care that the returned value is a string, | 587 | When doing so, please take care that the returned value is a string, |
| 588 | or a list containing a string, even when the input argument has an | 588 | or a list containing a string, even when the input argument has an |
| 589 | unexpected value. Here is an example: | 589 | unexpected value. Here is an example: |
| 590 | 590 | ||
| 591 | @example | 591 | @example |
| 592 | (lambda (val) | 592 | (lambda (val) |
| @@ -769,24 +769,24 @@ list. | |||
| 769 | 769 | ||
| 770 | @vindex ses-jump-cell-name-function | 770 | @vindex ses-jump-cell-name-function |
| 771 | @code{ses-jump-cell-name-function} is a customizable variable by | 771 | @code{ses-jump-cell-name-function} is a customizable variable by |
| 772 | default set to the @code{upcase} function. This function is called | 772 | default set to the @code{upcase} function. This function is called |
| 773 | when you pass a cell name to the @command{ses-jump} command (@kbd{j}), | 773 | when you pass a cell name to the @command{ses-jump} command (@kbd{j}), |
| 774 | @c TODO : propagate extra explanation from the French version. | 774 | @c TODO : propagate extra explanation from the French version. |
| 775 | it changes the entered cell name to that where to jump. The default | 775 | it changes the entered cell name to that where to jump. The default |
| 776 | setting @code{upcase} allows you to enter the cell name in low | 776 | setting @code{upcase} allows you to enter the cell name in low |
| 777 | case. Another use of @code{ses-jump-cell-name-function} could be some | 777 | case. Another use of @code{ses-jump-cell-name-function} could be some |
| 778 | internationalization to convert non latin characters into latin | 778 | internationalization to convert non latin characters into latin |
| 779 | equivalents to name the cell. Instead of a cell name, the function may | 779 | equivalents to name the cell. Instead of a cell name, the function may |
| 780 | return cell coordinates in the form of a cons, for instance @code{(0 | 780 | return cell coordinates in the form of a cons, for instance @code{(0 |
| 781 | . 0)} for cell @code{A1}, @code{(1 . 0)} for cell @code{A2}, etc. | 781 | . 0)} for cell @code{A1}, @code{(1 . 0)} for cell @code{A2}, etc. |
| 782 | 782 | ||
| 783 | @vindex ses-jump-prefix-function | 783 | @vindex ses-jump-prefix-function |
| 784 | @code{ses-jump-prefix-function} is a customizable variable by default | 784 | @code{ses-jump-prefix-function} is a customizable variable by default |
| 785 | set to the @code{ses-jump-prefix} function. This function is called | 785 | set to the @code{ses-jump-prefix} function. This function is called |
| 786 | when you give a prefix argument to the @command{ses-jump} command | 786 | when you give a prefix argument to the @command{ses-jump} command |
| 787 | (@kbd{j}). It returns a cell name or cell coordinates corresponding to | 787 | (@kbd{j}). It returns a cell name or cell coordinates corresponding to |
| 788 | the prefix argument. Cell coordinates are in the form of a cons, for | 788 | the prefix argument. Cell coordinates are in the form of a cons, for |
| 789 | instance @code{(1 . 0)} for cell @code{A2}. The default setting | 789 | instance @code{(1 . 0)} for cell @code{A2}. The default setting |
| 790 | @code{ses-jump-prefix} will number cells left to right and then top | 790 | @code{ses-jump-prefix} will number cells left to right and then top |
| 791 | down, so assuming a 4x3 spreadsheet prefix argument @samp{0} jumps to | 791 | down, so assuming a 4x3 spreadsheet prefix argument @samp{0} jumps to |
| 792 | cell @samp{A1}, prefix argument @samp{2} jumps to @samp{C1}, prefix | 792 | cell @samp{A1}, prefix argument @samp{2} jumps to @samp{C1}, prefix |
| @@ -841,7 +841,7 @@ valid local variable name (See also @ref{Nonrelocatable references}). | |||
| 841 | @findex ses-repair-cell-reference-all | 841 | @findex ses-repair-cell-reference-all |
| 842 | When you interrupt a cell formula update by typing @kbd{C-g}, then | 842 | When you interrupt a cell formula update by typing @kbd{C-g}, then |
| 843 | the cell reference link may be broken, which will jeopardize automatic | 843 | the cell reference link may be broken, which will jeopardize automatic |
| 844 | cell update when any other cell on which it depends is changed. To | 844 | cell update when any other cell on which it depends is changed. To |
| 845 | repair that use function @code{ses-repair-cell-reference-all} | 845 | repair that use function @code{ses-repair-cell-reference-all} |
| 846 | @end table | 846 | @end table |
| 847 | 847 | ||
| @@ -946,21 +946,21 @@ Flags can be added to @code{ses-range} immediately after the @var{to} | |||
| 946 | cell. | 946 | cell. |
| 947 | @table @code | 947 | @table @code |
| 948 | @item ! | 948 | @item ! |
| 949 | Empty cells in range can be removed by adding the @code{!} flag. An | 949 | Empty cells in range can be removed by adding the @code{!} flag. An |
| 950 | empty cell is a cell the value of which is one of symbols @code{nil} | 950 | empty cell is a cell the value of which is one of symbols @code{nil} |
| 951 | or @code{*skip*}. For instance @code{(ses-range A1 A4 !)} will do the | 951 | or @code{*skip*}. For instance @code{(ses-range A1 A4 !)} will do the |
| 952 | same as @code{(list A1 A3)} when cells @code{A2} and @code{A4} are | 952 | same as @code{(list A1 A3)} when cells @code{A2} and @code{A4} are |
| 953 | empty. | 953 | empty. |
| 954 | @item _ | 954 | @item _ |
| 955 | Empty cell values are replaced by the argument following flag | 955 | Empty cell values are replaced by the argument following flag |
| 956 | @code{_}, or @code{0} when flag @code{_} is last in argument list. For | 956 | @code{_}, or @code{0} when flag @code{_} is last in argument list. For |
| 957 | instance @code{(ses-range A1 A4 _ "empty")} will do the same as | 957 | instance @code{(ses-range A1 A4 _ "empty")} will do the same as |
| 958 | @code{(list A1 "empty" A3 "empty")} when cells @code{A2} and @code{A4} | 958 | @code{(list A1 "empty" A3 "empty")} when cells @code{A2} and @code{A4} |
| 959 | are empty. Similarly, @code{(ses-range A1 A4 _ )} will do the same as | 959 | are empty. Similarly, @code{(ses-range A1 A4 _ )} will do the same as |
| 960 | @code{(list A1 0 A3 0)}. | 960 | @code{(list A1 0 A3 0)}. |
| 961 | @item >v | 961 | @item >v |
| 962 | When order matters, list cells by reading cells row-wise from top left | 962 | When order matters, list cells by reading cells row-wise from top left |
| 963 | to bottom right. This flag is provided for completeness only as it is | 963 | to bottom right. This flag is provided for completeness only as it is |
| 964 | the default reading order. | 964 | the default reading order. |
| 965 | @item <v | 965 | @item <v |
| 966 | List cells by reading cells row-wise from top right to bottom left. | 966 | List cells by reading cells row-wise from top right to bottom left. |
| @@ -978,7 +978,7 @@ A short hand for @code{>v}. | |||
| 978 | A short hand for @code{>^}. | 978 | A short hand for @code{>^}. |
| 979 | @item * | 979 | @item * |
| 980 | Instead of listing cells, it makes a Calc vector or matrix of it | 980 | Instead of listing cells, it makes a Calc vector or matrix of it |
| 981 | (@pxref{Top,,,calc,GNU Emacs Calc Manual}). If the range contains only | 981 | (@pxref{Top,,,calc,GNU Emacs Calc Manual}). If the range contains only |
| 982 | one row or one column a vector is made, otherwise a matrix is made. | 982 | one row or one column a vector is made, otherwise a matrix is made. |
| 983 | @item *2 | 983 | @item *2 |
| 984 | Same as @code{*} except that a matrix is always made even when there | 984 | Same as @code{*} except that a matrix is always made even when there |
| @@ -1033,7 +1033,7 @@ are some useful functions to call from your formulas: | |||
| 1033 | @table @code | 1033 | @table @code |
| 1034 | @item (ses-delete-blanks &rest @var{args}) | 1034 | @item (ses-delete-blanks &rest @var{args}) |
| 1035 | Returns a list from which all blank cells (value is either @code{nil} | 1035 | Returns a list from which all blank cells (value is either @code{nil} |
| 1036 | or '*skip*) have been deleted. Order of args is reverted. Please note | 1036 | or '*skip*) have been deleted. Order of args is reverted. Please note |
| 1037 | that @code{ses-range} has a @code{!} modifier that enables removing | 1037 | that @code{ses-range} has a @code{!} modifier that enables removing |
| 1038 | blanks, so it is possible to write: | 1038 | blanks, so it is possible to write: |
| 1039 | @lisp | 1039 | @lisp |
| @@ -1250,8 +1250,8 @@ The best way is to rename cells that you do @emph{not} want to be | |||
| 1250 | relocatable by using @code{ses-rename-cell}. | 1250 | relocatable by using @code{ses-rename-cell}. |
| 1251 | @findex ses-rename-cell | 1251 | @findex ses-rename-cell |
| 1252 | Cells that do not have an A1-like name style are not relocated on | 1252 | Cells that do not have an A1-like name style are not relocated on |
| 1253 | yank. Using this method, the concerned cells won't be relocated | 1253 | yank. Using this method, the concerned cells won't be relocated |
| 1254 | whatever formula they appear in. Please note however that when a | 1254 | whatever formula they appear in. Please note however that when a |
| 1255 | formula contains some range @code{(ses-range @var{cell1} @var{cell2})} | 1255 | formula contains some range @code{(ses-range @var{cell1} @var{cell2})} |
| 1256 | then in the yanked formula each range bound @var{cell1} and | 1256 | then in the yanked formula each range bound @var{cell1} and |
| 1257 | @var{cell2} are relocated, or not, independently, depending on whether | 1257 | @var{cell2} are relocated, or not, independently, depending on whether |
diff --git a/doc/misc/speedbar.texi b/doc/misc/speedbar.texi index f4b9ee702a7..428873e59e7 100644 --- a/doc/misc/speedbar.texi +++ b/doc/misc/speedbar.texi | |||
| @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ packages, and web browsers. | |||
| 48 | 48 | ||
| 49 | Speedbar displays a narrow frame in which a tree view is shown. This | 49 | Speedbar displays a narrow frame in which a tree view is shown. This |
| 50 | tree view defaults to containing a list of files and directories. Files | 50 | tree view defaults to containing a list of files and directories. Files |
| 51 | can be ``expanded'' to list tags inside. Directories can be expanded to | 51 | can be ``expanded'' to list tags inside. Directories can be expanded to |
| 52 | list the files within them. Each file or tag can be jumped to | 52 | list the files within them. Each file or tag can be jumped to |
| 53 | immediately. | 53 | immediately. |
| 54 | 54 | ||
diff --git a/doc/misc/todo-mode.texi b/doc/misc/todo-mode.texi index 9f259b0e65b..e4826e6c5f4 100644 --- a/doc/misc/todo-mode.texi +++ b/doc/misc/todo-mode.texi | |||
| @@ -812,7 +812,7 @@ or by removing it if present. | |||
| 812 | 812 | ||
| 813 | @samp{nonmarking} (@kbd{k}): Change the current item's calendar | 813 | @samp{nonmarking} (@kbd{k}): Change the current item's calendar |
| 814 | marking status by adding @code{diary-nonmarking-symbol} if the item | 814 | marking status by adding @code{diary-nonmarking-symbol} if the item |
| 815 | lacks this, or by removing it if present. Since this symbol only | 815 | lacks this, or by removing it if present. Since this symbol only |
| 816 | applies to diary items, the item is automatically marked as such, | 816 | applies to diary items, the item is automatically marked as such, |
| 817 | i.e., if @code{todo-nondiary-marker} is present, it is removed. | 817 | i.e., if @code{todo-nondiary-marker} is present, it is removed. |
| 818 | 818 | ||
| @@ -1799,7 +1799,7 @@ current file: | |||
| 1799 | Hide the item headers if visible, or show them if they are hidden. | 1799 | Hide the item headers if visible, or show them if they are hidden. |
| 1800 | With done items, only the done header (i.e., the done tag and date-time | 1800 | With done items, only the done header (i.e., the done tag and date-time |
| 1801 | string inserted when the item was marked done) is hidden, the original | 1801 | string inserted when the item was marked done) is hidden, the original |
| 1802 | date-time string is not. With filtered items, the category (or | 1802 | date-time string is not. With filtered items, the category (or |
| 1803 | category-file) tag is not hidden. | 1803 | category-file) tag is not hidden. |
| 1804 | 1804 | ||
| 1805 | @item F H | 1805 | @item F H |
diff --git a/doc/misc/transient.texi b/doc/misc/transient.texi index 9245a76e66b..7419ce39206 100644 --- a/doc/misc/transient.texi +++ b/doc/misc/transient.texi | |||
| @@ -165,9 +165,9 @@ commands even have so many options that they introduce @emph{subcommands} | |||
| 165 | @anchor{Using Transient for composing interactive commands} | 165 | @anchor{Using Transient for composing interactive commands} |
| 166 | @heading Using Transient for composing interactive commands | 166 | @heading Using Transient for composing interactive commands |
| 167 | 167 | ||
| 168 | What about Emacs commands used interactively? How do these handle | 168 | What about Emacs commands used interactively? How do these handle |
| 169 | options? One solution is to make many versions of the same command, | 169 | options? One solution is to make many versions of the same command, |
| 170 | so you don't need to! Consider: @samp{delete-other-windows} vs. | 170 | so you don't need to! Consider: @samp{delete-other-windows} vs. |
| 171 | @samp{delete-other-windows-vertically} (among many similar examples). | 171 | @samp{delete-other-windows-vertically} (among many similar examples). |
| 172 | 172 | ||
| 173 | Some Emacs commands will simply prompt you for the next "argument" | 173 | Some Emacs commands will simply prompt you for the next "argument" |
| @@ -1019,7 +1019,7 @@ independently. See @ref{Using History}. | |||
| 1019 | After a transient prefix command is invoked, @kbd{C-h @var{KEY}} can be used to | 1019 | After a transient prefix command is invoked, @kbd{C-h @var{KEY}} can be used to |
| 1020 | show the documentation for the infix or suffix command that @kbd{@var{KEY}} is | 1020 | show the documentation for the infix or suffix command that @kbd{@var{KEY}} is |
| 1021 | bound to (see @ref{Getting Help for Suffix Commands}), and infixes and | 1021 | bound to (see @ref{Getting Help for Suffix Commands}), and infixes and |
| 1022 | suffixes can be removed from the transient using @kbd{C-x l @var{KEY}}. Infixes | 1022 | suffixes can be removed from the transient using @kbd{C-x l @var{KEY}}. Infixes |
| 1023 | and suffixes that are disabled by default can be enabled the same way. | 1023 | and suffixes that are disabled by default can be enabled the same way. |
| 1024 | See @ref{Enabling and Disabling Suffixes}. | 1024 | See @ref{Enabling and Disabling Suffixes}. |
| 1025 | 1025 | ||
| @@ -1287,7 +1287,7 @@ individual suffix command. | |||
| 1287 | The same form is also used when later binding additional commands | 1287 | The same form is also used when later binding additional commands |
| 1288 | using functions such as @code{transient-insert-suffix}, see @ref{Modifying Existing Transients}. | 1288 | using functions such as @code{transient-insert-suffix}, see @ref{Modifying Existing Transients}. |
| 1289 | 1289 | ||
| 1290 | Note that an infix is a special kind of suffix. Depending on context | 1290 | Note that an infix is a special kind of suffix. Depending on context |
| 1291 | ``suffixes'' means ``suffixes (including infixes)'' or ``non-infix | 1291 | ``suffixes'' means ``suffixes (including infixes)'' or ``non-infix |
| 1292 | suffixes''. Here it means the former. | 1292 | suffixes''. Here it means the former. |
| 1293 | 1293 | ||
| @@ -1382,7 +1382,7 @@ argument supported by the constructor of that class. See @ref{Suffix Slots}. | |||
| 1382 | @cindex defining suffix commands | 1382 | @cindex defining suffix commands |
| 1383 | @cindex defining infix commands | 1383 | @cindex defining infix commands |
| 1384 | 1384 | ||
| 1385 | Note that an infix is a special kind of suffix. Depending on context | 1385 | Note that an infix is a special kind of suffix. Depending on context |
| 1386 | ``suffixes'' means ``suffixes (including infixes)'' or ``non-infix | 1386 | ``suffixes'' means ``suffixes (including infixes)'' or ``non-infix |
| 1387 | suffixes''. | 1387 | suffixes''. |
| 1388 | 1388 | ||
diff --git a/doc/misc/use-package.texi b/doc/misc/use-package.texi index c2b6404b68b..99348398550 100644 --- a/doc/misc/use-package.texi +++ b/doc/misc/use-package.texi | |||
| @@ -1612,8 +1612,8 @@ You can override the above setting for a single package by adding | |||
| 1612 | 1612 | ||
| 1613 | @findex :vc | 1613 | @findex :vc |
| 1614 | The @code{:vc} keyword can be used to control how packages are | 1614 | The @code{:vc} keyword can be used to control how packages are |
| 1615 | downloaded and/or installed. More specifically, it allows one to fetch | 1615 | downloaded and/or installed. More specifically, it allows one to fetch |
| 1616 | and update packages directly from a version control system. This is | 1616 | and update packages directly from a version control system. This is |
| 1617 | especially convenient when wanting to install a package that is not on | 1617 | especially convenient when wanting to install a package that is not on |
| 1618 | any package archive. | 1618 | any package archive. |
| 1619 | 1619 | ||
diff --git a/doc/misc/vhdl-mode.texi b/doc/misc/vhdl-mode.texi index 86df723aa5a..e7eb1025ea4 100644 --- a/doc/misc/vhdl-mode.texi +++ b/doc/misc/vhdl-mode.texi | |||
| @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ modify this GNU manual.'' | |||
| 79 | @chapter Introduction | 79 | @chapter Introduction |
| 80 | @cindex Introduction | 80 | @cindex Introduction |
| 81 | 81 | ||
| 82 | Welcome to VHDL Mode. This is a GNU Emacs mode for editing files | 82 | Welcome to VHDL Mode. This is a GNU Emacs mode for editing files |
| 83 | containing VHDL code. | 83 | containing VHDL code. |
| 84 | 84 | ||
| 85 | This manual will describe the following: | 85 | This manual will describe the following: |
| @@ -99,18 +99,18 @@ How to customize the indentation engine. | |||
| 99 | @findex vhdl-version | 99 | @findex vhdl-version |
| 100 | The major version number was incremented to 3 with the addition of | 100 | The major version number was incremented to 3 with the addition of |
| 101 | many new features for editing VHDL code to the new indentation engine, | 101 | many new features for editing VHDL code to the new indentation engine, |
| 102 | which was introduced in major version 2. To find the minor revision | 102 | which was introduced in major version 2. To find the minor revision |
| 103 | number of this release, use @kbd{M-x vhdl-version @key{RET}}. | 103 | number of this release, use @kbd{M-x vhdl-version @key{RET}}. |
| 104 | 104 | ||
| 105 | A special word of thanks goes to Rod Whitby, who wrote the | 105 | A special word of thanks goes to Rod Whitby, who wrote the |
| 106 | VHDL Mode indentation engine, and to Barry Warsaw, who wrote | 106 | VHDL Mode indentation engine, and to Barry Warsaw, who wrote |
| 107 | the CC Mode indentation engine that formed the basis | 107 | the CC Mode indentation engine that formed the basis |
| 108 | thereof. Their manuals were also the basis for this manual. | 108 | thereof. Their manuals were also the basis for this manual. |
| 109 | 109 | ||
| 110 | This manual is not very up-to-date. It basically contains the | 110 | This manual is not very up-to-date. It basically contains the |
| 111 | indentation machine documentation by Rod Whitby with only minor | 111 | indentation machine documentation by Rod Whitby with only minor |
| 112 | adaptions. A short documentation of the entire VHDL Mode is available | 112 | adaptions. A short documentation of the entire VHDL Mode is available |
| 113 | within the mode itself by typing @kbd{C-c C-h}. Also, all commands and | 113 | within the mode itself by typing @kbd{C-c C-h}. Also, all commands and |
| 114 | customization of most variables are available through the menu, which | 114 | customization of most variables are available through the menu, which |
| 115 | makes everything highly self-explaining. | 115 | makes everything highly self-explaining. |
| 116 | 116 | ||
| @@ -126,14 +126,14 @@ To get started, simply visit a @file{.vhd} file in Emacs; or type | |||
| 126 | @cindex New Indentation Engine | 126 | @cindex New Indentation Engine |
| 127 | 127 | ||
| 128 | VHDL Mode has a new indentation engine, providing a simplified, yet | 128 | VHDL Mode has a new indentation engine, providing a simplified, yet |
| 129 | flexible and general mechanism for customizing indentation. It breaks | 129 | flexible and general mechanism for customizing indentation. It breaks |
| 130 | indentation calculation into two steps. First for the line of code being | 130 | indentation calculation into two steps. First for the line of code being |
| 131 | indented, VHDL Mode analyzes what kind of language construct it's | 131 | indented, VHDL Mode analyzes what kind of language construct it's |
| 132 | looking at, then it applies user defined offsets to the current line | 132 | looking at, then it applies user defined offsets to the current line |
| 133 | based on this analysis. | 133 | based on this analysis. |
| 134 | 134 | ||
| 135 | This section will briefly cover how indentation is calculated in | 135 | This section will briefly cover how indentation is calculated in |
| 136 | VHDL Mode. It is important to understand the indentation model | 136 | VHDL Mode. It is important to understand the indentation model |
| 137 | being used so that you will know how to customize VHDL Mode for | 137 | being used so that you will know how to customize VHDL Mode for |
| 138 | your personal coding style. | 138 | your personal coding style. |
| 139 | 139 | ||
| @@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ Conceptually, a line of VHDL code is always indented relative to the | |||
| 169 | indentation of some line higher up in the buffer. This is represented | 169 | indentation of some line higher up in the buffer. This is represented |
| 170 | by the relative buffer position in the syntactic component. | 170 | by the relative buffer position in the syntactic component. |
| 171 | 171 | ||
| 172 | It might help to see an example. Suppose we had the following code as | 172 | It might help to see an example. Suppose we had the following code as |
| 173 | the only thing in a VHDL Mode buffer @footnote{The line numbers | 173 | the only thing in a VHDL Mode buffer @footnote{The line numbers |
| 174 | in this and future examples don't actually appear in the buffer.}: | 174 | in this and future examples don't actually appear in the buffer.}: |
| 175 | @example | 175 | @example |
| @@ -652,7 +652,7 @@ one of the syntactic symbol offsets will need to be tweaked slightly, or | |||
| 652 | perhaps @code{vhdl-basic-offset} will need to be changed. However, some | 652 | perhaps @code{vhdl-basic-offset} will need to be changed. However, some |
| 653 | styles require a more advanced ability for customization, and one of the | 653 | styles require a more advanced ability for customization, and one of the |
| 654 | real strengths of VHDL Mode is that the syntactic analysis model | 654 | real strengths of VHDL Mode is that the syntactic analysis model |
| 655 | provides a very flexible framework for customizing indentation. This | 655 | provides a very flexible framework for customizing indentation. This |
| 656 | allows you to perform special indentation calculations for situations | 656 | allows you to perform special indentation calculations for situations |
| 657 | not handled by the mode directly. | 657 | not handled by the mode directly. |
| 658 | 658 | ||
| @@ -833,13 +833,13 @@ symbol currently recognized} | |||
| 833 | @strong{Q.} @emph{How do I re-indent the whole file?} | 833 | @strong{Q.} @emph{How do I re-indent the whole file?} |
| 834 | 834 | ||
| 835 | @strong{A.} Visit the file and hit @kbd{C-x h} to mark the whole | 835 | @strong{A.} Visit the file and hit @kbd{C-x h} to mark the whole |
| 836 | buffer. Then hit @kbd{@key{ESC} C-\} to re-indent the entire region | 836 | buffer. Then hit @kbd{@key{ESC} C-\} to re-indent the entire region |
| 837 | which you've just marked. Or just enter @kbd{M-x vhdl-indent-buffer}. | 837 | which you've just marked. Or just enter @kbd{M-x vhdl-indent-buffer}. |
| 838 | @sp 2 | 838 | @sp 2 |
| 839 | 839 | ||
| 840 | @strong{Q.} @emph{How do I re-indent the entire function?} | 840 | @strong{Q.} @emph{How do I re-indent the entire function?} |
| 841 | 841 | ||
| 842 | @strong{A.} Hit @kbd{@key{ESC} C-h} to mark the entire function. Then | 842 | @strong{A.} Hit @kbd{@key{ESC} C-h} to mark the entire function. Then |
| 843 | hit @kbd{@key{ESC} C-\} to re-indent the entire region which you've just | 843 | hit @kbd{@key{ESC} C-\} to re-indent the entire region which you've just |
| 844 | marked. | 844 | marked. |
| 845 | @sp 2 | 845 | @sp 2 |
diff --git a/doc/misc/vip.texi b/doc/misc/vip.texi index 0248edb328f..6907966f861 100644 --- a/doc/misc/vip.texi +++ b/doc/misc/vip.texi | |||
| @@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ M-x vip-mode | |||
| 190 | @kindex 0301 C-x C-z @r{(}@code{suspend-emacs}@r{)} | 190 | @kindex 0301 C-x C-z @r{(}@code{suspend-emacs}@r{)} |
| 191 | 191 | ||
| 192 | Loading VIP has the effect of globally binding @kbd{C-z} (@kbd{Control-z}) | 192 | Loading VIP has the effect of globally binding @kbd{C-z} (@kbd{Control-z}) |
| 193 | to the function @code{vip-change-mode-to-vi}. The default binding of @kbd{C-z} | 193 | to the function @code{vip-change-mode-to-vi}. The default binding of @kbd{C-z} |
| 194 | in GNU Emacs is @code{suspend-emacs}, but, you can also call | 194 | in GNU Emacs is @code{suspend-emacs}, but, you can also call |
| 195 | @code{suspend-emacs} by typing @kbd{C-x C-z}. Other than this, all the | 195 | @code{suspend-emacs} by typing @kbd{C-x C-z}. Other than this, all the |
| 196 | key bindings of Emacs remain the same after loading VIP. | 196 | key bindings of Emacs remain the same after loading VIP. |
| @@ -400,7 +400,7 @@ Given counts, text will be yanked (in Vi's sense) that many times. Thus | |||
| 400 | @itemx O | 400 | @itemx O |
| 401 | @kindex 157 o @r{(}@code{vip-open-line}@r{)} | 401 | @kindex 157 o @r{(}@code{vip-open-line}@r{)} |
| 402 | @kindex 117 O @r{(}@code{vip-Open-line}@r{)} | 402 | @kindex 117 O @r{(}@code{vip-Open-line}@r{)} |
| 403 | Given counts, that many copies of text will be inserted. Thus | 403 | Given counts, that many copies of text will be inserted. Thus |
| 404 | @kbd{o a b c @key{ESC}} will insert 3 lines of @samp{abc} below the current | 404 | @kbd{o a b c @key{ESC}} will insert 3 lines of @samp{abc} below the current |
| 405 | line. | 405 | line. |
| 406 | @item / | 406 | @item / |
| @@ -474,7 +474,7 @@ Forward incremental search. | |||
| 474 | @kindex 033 ESC @r{(}@code{vip-ESC}@r{)} | 474 | @kindex 033 ESC @r{(}@code{vip-ESC}@r{)} |
| 475 | These keys will exit from vi mode and return to emacs mode temporarily. If | 475 | These keys will exit from vi mode and return to emacs mode temporarily. If |
| 476 | you hit one of these keys, Emacs will be in emacs mode and will believe | 476 | you hit one of these keys, Emacs will be in emacs mode and will believe |
| 477 | that you hit that key in emacs mode. For example, if you hit @kbd{C-x} | 477 | that you hit that key in emacs mode. For example, if you hit @kbd{C-x} |
| 478 | followed by @kbd{2}, then the current window will be split into 2 and you | 478 | followed by @kbd{2}, then the current window will be split into 2 and you |
| 479 | will be in vi mode again. | 479 | will be in vi mode again. |
| 480 | @item \ | 480 | @item \ |
| @@ -517,7 +517,7 @@ Change upper-case characters in the region to lower case | |||
| 517 | (@code{downcase-region}). | 517 | (@code{downcase-region}). |
| 518 | @item # C | 518 | @item # C |
| 519 | @kindex 0431 # C @r{(}@code{upcase-region}@r{)} | 519 | @kindex 0431 # C @r{(}@code{upcase-region}@r{)} |
| 520 | Change lower-case characters in the region to upper case. For instance, | 520 | Change lower-case characters in the region to upper case. For instance, |
| 521 | @kbd{# C 3 w} will capitalize 3 words from the current point | 521 | @kbd{# C 3 w} will capitalize 3 words from the current point |
| 522 | (@code{upcase-region}). | 522 | (@code{upcase-region}). |
| 523 | @item # g | 523 | @item # g |
| @@ -574,14 +574,14 @@ in the current window, while @kbd{S} selects buffer in another window. | |||
| 574 | @kindex 1300 X @r{(}@code{vip-ctl-x-equivalent}@r{)} | 574 | @kindex 1300 X @r{(}@code{vip-ctl-x-equivalent}@r{)} |
| 575 | These keys will exit from vi mode and return to emacs mode temporarily. | 575 | These keys will exit from vi mode and return to emacs mode temporarily. |
| 576 | If you type @kbd{C} (@kbd{X}), Emacs will be in emacs mode and will believe | 576 | If you type @kbd{C} (@kbd{X}), Emacs will be in emacs mode and will believe |
| 577 | that you have typed @kbd{C-c} (@kbd{C-x}) in emacs mode. Moreover, | 577 | that you have typed @kbd{C-c} (@kbd{C-x}) in emacs mode. Moreover, |
| 578 | if the following character you type is an upper-case letter, then Emacs | 578 | if the following character you type is an upper-case letter, then Emacs |
| 579 | will believe that you have typed the corresponding control character. | 579 | will believe that you have typed the corresponding control character. |
| 580 | You will be in vi mode again after the command is executed. For example, | 580 | You will be in vi mode again after the command is executed. For example, |
| 581 | typing @kbd{X S} in vi mode is the same as typing @kbd{C-x C-s} in emacs | 581 | typing @kbd{X S} in vi mode is the same as typing @kbd{C-x C-s} in emacs |
| 582 | mode. You get the same effect by typing @kbd{C-x C-s} in vi mode, but | 582 | mode. You get the same effect by typing @kbd{C-x C-s} in vi mode, but |
| 583 | the idea here is that you can execute useful Emacs commands without typing | 583 | the idea here is that you can execute useful Emacs commands without typing |
| 584 | control characters. For example, if you hit @kbd{X} (or @kbd{C-x}) followed | 584 | control characters. For example, if you hit @kbd{X} (or @kbd{C-x}) followed |
| 585 | by @kbd{2}, then the current window will be split into 2 and you will be in | 585 | by @kbd{2}, then the current window will be split into 2 and you will be in |
| 586 | vi mode again. | 586 | vi mode again. |
| 587 | @end table | 587 | @end table |
| @@ -1307,7 +1307,7 @@ The line commands are as follows: | |||
| 1307 | @cindex expanding (region) | 1307 | @cindex expanding (region) |
| 1308 | If a point command is given as an argument to a modifying command, the | 1308 | If a point command is given as an argument to a modifying command, the |
| 1309 | region determined by the point command will be affected by the modifying | 1309 | region determined by the point command will be affected by the modifying |
| 1310 | command. On the other hand, if a line command is given as an argument to a | 1310 | command. On the other hand, if a line command is given as an argument to a |
| 1311 | modifying command, the region determined by the line command will be | 1311 | modifying command, the region determined by the line command will be |
| 1312 | enlarged so that it will become the smallest region properly containing the | 1312 | enlarged so that it will become the smallest region properly containing the |
| 1313 | region and consisting of whole lines (we call this process @dfn{expanding | 1313 | region and consisting of whole lines (we call this process @dfn{expanding |
| @@ -1418,9 +1418,9 @@ below. | |||
| 1418 | @item p | 1418 | @item p |
| 1419 | @kindex 160 p @r{(}@code{vip-put-back}@r{)} | 1419 | @kindex 160 p @r{(}@code{vip-put-back}@r{)} |
| 1420 | Insert, after the character point is looking at, most recently | 1420 | Insert, after the character point is looking at, most recently |
| 1421 | deleted/yanked text from anonymous register. Given a register name | 1421 | deleted/yanked text from anonymous register. Given a register name |
| 1422 | argument, the content of the named register will be put back. Given a | 1422 | argument, the content of the named register will be put back. Given a |
| 1423 | count, the command will be repeated that many times. This command also | 1423 | count, the command will be repeated that many times. This command also |
| 1424 | checks if the text to put back ends with a new line character, and if so | 1424 | checks if the text to put back ends with a new line character, and if so |
| 1425 | the text will be put below the current line (@code{vip-put-back}). | 1425 | the text will be put below the current line (@code{vip-put-back}). |
| 1426 | @item P | 1426 | @item P |
diff --git a/doc/misc/viper.texi b/doc/misc/viper.texi index 01e94de4e48..20ca1a58ae9 100644 --- a/doc/misc/viper.texi +++ b/doc/misc/viper.texi | |||
| @@ -163,10 +163,10 @@ some incompatibilities. | |||
| 163 | 163 | ||
| 164 | This manual is written with the assumption that you are an experienced Vi | 164 | This manual is written with the assumption that you are an experienced Vi |
| 165 | user who wants to switch to Emacs while retaining the ability to edit files | 165 | user who wants to switch to Emacs while retaining the ability to edit files |
| 166 | Vi style. Incredible as it might seem, there are experienced Emacs users | 166 | Vi style. Incredible as it might seem, there are experienced Emacs users |
| 167 | who use Viper as a backdoor into the superior (as every Vi user already knows) | 167 | who use Viper as a backdoor into the superior (as every Vi user already knows) |
| 168 | world of Vi! These users are well familiar with Emacs bindings and prefer them | 168 | world of Vi! These users are well familiar with Emacs bindings and prefer them |
| 169 | in some cases, especially in the Vi Insert state. John Hawkins | 169 | in some cases, especially in the Vi Insert state. John Hawkins |
| 170 | <jshawkin@@eecs.umich.edu> has provided a set of customizations, which | 170 | <jshawkin@@eecs.umich.edu> has provided a set of customizations, which |
| 171 | enables additional Emacs bindings under Viper. These customizations can be | 171 | enables additional Emacs bindings under Viper. These customizations can be |
| 172 | included in your @file{~/.emacs.d/viper} file and are found at the | 172 | included in your @file{~/.emacs.d/viper} file and are found at the |
| @@ -335,7 +335,7 @@ Viper. | |||
| 335 | 335 | ||
| 336 | The latest versions of Emacs have an interactive customization facility, | 336 | The latest versions of Emacs have an interactive customization facility, |
| 337 | which allows you to (mostly) bypass the use of the @file{.emacs} and | 337 | which allows you to (mostly) bypass the use of the @file{.emacs} and |
| 338 | @code{viper-custom-file-name} files. You can reach this customization | 338 | @code{viper-custom-file-name} files. You can reach this customization |
| 339 | facility from within Viper's VI state by executing the Ex command | 339 | facility from within Viper's VI state by executing the Ex command |
| 340 | @kbd{:customize}. | 340 | @kbd{:customize}. |
| 341 | 341 | ||
| @@ -1589,10 +1589,10 @@ you are doing. Only two variables, @code{viper-mode} and | |||
| 1589 | prior to loading Viper (i.e., prior to @code{(require 'viper)} command. | 1589 | prior to loading Viper (i.e., prior to @code{(require 'viper)} command. |
| 1590 | @item | 1590 | @item |
| 1591 | @cindex Ex customize | 1591 | @cindex Ex customize |
| 1592 | By executing the @kbd{:customize} Ex command. This takes you to the Emacs | 1592 | By executing the @kbd{:customize} Ex command. This takes you to the Emacs |
| 1593 | customization widget, which lets you change the values of Viper | 1593 | customization widget, which lets you change the values of Viper |
| 1594 | customizable variables easily. This method is good for novice and | 1594 | customizable variables easily. This method is good for novice and |
| 1595 | experts alike. The customization code in the form of Lisp commands will be | 1595 | experts alike. The customization code in the form of Lisp commands will be |
| 1596 | placed in @file{~/.emacs} or some other customization file depending on the | 1596 | placed in @file{~/.emacs} or some other customization file depending on the |
| 1597 | version of Emacs that you use. Still, it is recommended to separate | 1597 | version of Emacs that you use. Still, it is recommended to separate |
| 1598 | Viper-related customization produced by the Emacs customization widget | 1598 | Viper-related customization produced by the Emacs customization widget |
| @@ -1766,7 +1766,7 @@ have to set it as a string inside double quotes. | |||
| 1766 | Function used by the command @kbd{#c<move>} to spell. | 1766 | Function used by the command @kbd{#c<move>} to spell. |
| 1767 | @item viper-glob-function | 1767 | @item viper-glob-function |
| 1768 | The value of this variable is the function symbol used to expand wildcard | 1768 | The value of this variable is the function symbol used to expand wildcard |
| 1769 | symbols. This is platform-dependent. The default tries to set this variable | 1769 | symbols. This is platform-dependent. The default tries to set this variable |
| 1770 | to work with most shells, MS Windows, etc. However, if it | 1770 | to work with most shells, MS Windows, etc. However, if it |
| 1771 | doesn't work the way you expect, you should write your own. | 1771 | doesn't work the way you expect, you should write your own. |
| 1772 | Use @code{viper-glob-unix-files} and @code{viper-glob-mswindows-files} in | 1772 | Use @code{viper-glob-unix-files} and @code{viper-glob-mswindows-files} in |
| @@ -2298,7 +2298,7 @@ suspicion is wrong, no harm is done if you harness a minor mode that | |||
| 2298 | doesn't need to be harnessed. | 2298 | doesn't need to be harnessed. |
| 2299 | 2299 | ||
| 2300 | It is recommended to harness even those minor modes that don't override | 2300 | It is recommended to harness even those minor modes that don't override |
| 2301 | Viper keys, but still have their own keymaps. A general way to | 2301 | Viper keys, but still have their own keymaps. A general way to |
| 2302 | make a minor mode, @code{my-mode}, | 2302 | make a minor mode, @code{my-mode}, |
| 2303 | compatible with Viper is to have the file @file{my-mode.el} include the following code: | 2303 | compatible with Viper is to have the file @file{my-mode.el} include the following code: |
| 2304 | 2304 | ||
| @@ -3099,7 +3099,7 @@ lines. | |||
| 3099 | @cindex % (Current file) | 3099 | @cindex % (Current file) |
| 3100 | Note that @samp{%} is used in Ex commands @kbd{:e} and @kbd{:r <shell-cmd>} | 3100 | Note that @samp{%} is used in Ex commands @kbd{:e} and @kbd{:r <shell-cmd>} |
| 3101 | to mean current file. If you want a @samp{%} in your command, it must be | 3101 | to mean current file. If you want a @samp{%} in your command, it must be |
| 3102 | escaped as @samp{\%}. Note that @kbd{:w} and the regular @kbd{:r <file>} | 3102 | escaped as @samp{\%}. Note that @kbd{:w} and the regular @kbd{:r <file>} |
| 3103 | command doesn't support the meta symbols @samp{%} and @samp{#}, because | 3103 | command doesn't support the meta symbols @samp{%} and @samp{#}, because |
| 3104 | file history is a better mechanism. | 3104 | file history is a better mechanism. |
| 3105 | @cindex # (Previous file) | 3105 | @cindex # (Previous file) |
| @@ -3452,7 +3452,7 @@ Mark the current file and position with the specified letter. | |||
| 3452 | Set the Emacs mark (@pxref{Emacs Preliminaries}) at point. | 3452 | Set the Emacs mark (@pxref{Emacs Preliminaries}) at point. |
| 3453 | @item m ^ | 3453 | @item m ^ |
| 3454 | Set the Emacs mark (@pxref{Emacs Preliminaries}) back to where it was last | 3454 | Set the Emacs mark (@pxref{Emacs Preliminaries}) back to where it was last |
| 3455 | set with the @kbd{m.} command. This is useful when you set the mark with | 3455 | set with the @kbd{m.} command. This is useful when you set the mark with |
| 3456 | @kbd{m.}, but then some other command (such as @kbd{L} or @kbd{G}) changes | 3456 | @kbd{m.}, but then some other command (such as @kbd{L} or @kbd{G}) changes |
| 3457 | it in a way that you didn't like. | 3457 | it in a way that you didn't like. |
| 3458 | @item m < | 3458 | @item m < |
| @@ -3701,9 +3701,9 @@ Repeat latest Ex substitute command, e.g., | |||
| 3701 | @itemx :g/Pat/p | 3701 | @itemx :g/Pat/p |
| 3702 | @itemx :v/Pat/p | 3702 | @itemx :v/Pat/p |
| 3703 | The above commands display certain buffer lines in a | 3703 | The above commands display certain buffer lines in a |
| 3704 | temporary buffer. The first form above displays the buffer lines between | 3704 | temporary buffer. The first form above displays the buffer lines between |
| 3705 | @kbd{x} and @kbd{y}. The second displays the lines of the buffer, which | 3705 | @kbd{x} and @kbd{y}. The second displays the lines of the buffer, which |
| 3706 | match a given pattern. The third form displays the lines that do @emph{not} | 3706 | match a given pattern. The third form displays the lines that do @emph{not} |
| 3707 | match the given pattern. | 3707 | match the given pattern. |
| 3708 | @item #c<move> | 3708 | @item #c<move> |
| 3709 | Change upper-case characters in the region to lower-case. | 3709 | Change upper-case characters in the region to lower-case. |
| @@ -3765,7 +3765,7 @@ found there (e.g., @samp{~} is not expanded to the result of the previous | |||
| 3765 | substitution). | 3765 | substitution). |
| 3766 | 3766 | ||
| 3767 | After typing @kbd{/} or @kbd{?} all the usual Emacs minibuffer commands, such as | 3767 | After typing @kbd{/} or @kbd{?} all the usual Emacs minibuffer commands, such as |
| 3768 | @kbd{M-p} and @kbd{M-n} are available. In addition, typing @kbd{C-s} will | 3768 | @kbd{M-p} and @kbd{M-n} are available. In addition, typing @kbd{C-s} will |
| 3769 | insert the last search string used by the Emacs incremental search command | 3769 | insert the last search string used by the Emacs incremental search command |
| 3770 | (which is bound to @kbd{C-s} everywhere except in this case). | 3770 | (which is bound to @kbd{C-s} everywhere except in this case). |
| 3771 | 3771 | ||
| @@ -3970,8 +3970,8 @@ In all file handling commands, space should be typed before entering the file | |||
| 3970 | name. If you need to type a modifier, such as @kbd{>>} or @kbd{!}, don't | 3970 | name. If you need to type a modifier, such as @kbd{>>} or @kbd{!}, don't |
| 3971 | put any space between the command and the modifier. | 3971 | put any space between the command and the modifier. |
| 3972 | 3972 | ||
| 3973 | Note that many Ex commands, e.g., @kbd{:w}, accept command arguments. The | 3973 | Note that many Ex commands, e.g., @kbd{:w}, accept command arguments. The |
| 3974 | effect is that the command would start acting on the current region. For | 3974 | effect is that the command would start acting on the current region. For |
| 3975 | instance, if the current region spans the lines 11 through 22, then if you | 3975 | instance, if the current region spans the lines 11 through 22, then if you |
| 3976 | type @kbd{1:w} you would see @samp{:11,22w} in the minibuffer. | 3976 | type @kbd{1:w} you would see @samp{:11,22w} in the minibuffer. |
| 3977 | 3977 | ||
| @@ -4028,7 +4028,7 @@ Preserve the file---autosave buffers. | |||
| 4028 | Recover file from autosave. | 4028 | Recover file from autosave. |
| 4029 | @item :f [<file>] | 4029 | @item :f [<file>] |
| 4030 | without the argument, prints file name and character/line information afout | 4030 | without the argument, prints file name and character/line information afout |
| 4031 | the currently visited file. With an argument, sets the currently visited | 4031 | the currently visited file. With an argument, sets the currently visited |
| 4032 | filename to @file{file}. | 4032 | filename to @file{file}. |
| 4033 | @item :cd [<dir>] | 4033 | @item :cd [<dir>] |
| 4034 | Set the working directory to <dir> (default home directory). | 4034 | Set the working directory to <dir> (default home directory). |
| @@ -4062,7 +4062,7 @@ Like @kbd{:n}, but the meaning of the variable | |||
| 4062 | Switch to another buffer. If @code{ex-cycle-other-window} is @code{t}, | 4062 | Switch to another buffer. If @code{ex-cycle-other-window} is @code{t}, |
| 4063 | switch in another window. Buffer completion is supported. | 4063 | switch in another window. Buffer completion is supported. |
| 4064 | The variable @code{viper-read-buffer-function} controls which function is | 4064 | The variable @code{viper-read-buffer-function} controls which function is |
| 4065 | actually used to read the buffer name. The default is @code{read-buffer}, | 4065 | actually used to read the buffer name. The default is @code{read-buffer}, |
| 4066 | but better alternatives are also available in Emacs (e.g., | 4066 | but better alternatives are also available in Emacs (e.g., |
| 4067 | @code{ido-read-buffer}). | 4067 | @code{ido-read-buffer}). |
| 4068 | @vindex viper-read-buffer-function | 4068 | @vindex viper-read-buffer-function |
| @@ -4459,7 +4459,7 @@ VIP 4.4, by Aamod Sane. This manual is an adaptation of the manual for VIP | |||
| 4459 | 4.4, which, in turn, was based on Sato's manual for VIP 3.5. | 4459 | 4.4, which, in turn, was based on Sato's manual for VIP 3.5. |
| 4460 | 4460 | ||
| 4461 | Many contributors on the Net pointed out bugs and suggested a number of | 4461 | Many contributors on the Net pointed out bugs and suggested a number of |
| 4462 | useful features. Scott Bronson and Samuel Padgett contributed patches that | 4462 | useful features. Scott Bronson and Samuel Padgett contributed patches that |
| 4463 | were incorporated in this code. Here is a hopefully complete list of | 4463 | were incorporated in this code. Here is a hopefully complete list of |
| 4464 | contributors: | 4464 | contributors: |
| 4465 | 4465 | ||
diff --git a/doc/misc/widget.texi b/doc/misc/widget.texi index 744b84ac80d..b6559b5b712 100644 --- a/doc/misc/widget.texi +++ b/doc/misc/widget.texi | |||
| @@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ Widget library will also use the new graphic features automatically. | |||
| 150 | A form consists of read only text for documentation and some fields, | 150 | A form consists of read only text for documentation and some fields, |
| 151 | where each field contains two parts, a tag and a value. The tags are | 151 | where each field contains two parts, a tag and a value. The tags are |
| 152 | used to identify the fields, so the documentation can refer to the | 152 | used to identify the fields, so the documentation can refer to the |
| 153 | @samp{foo field}, meaning the field tagged with @samp{Foo}. Here is an | 153 | @samp{foo field}, meaning the field tagged with @samp{Foo}. Here is an |
| 154 | example form: | 154 | example form: |
| 155 | 155 | ||
| 156 | @example | 156 | @example |
| @@ -865,7 +865,7 @@ the @code{:mouse-down-action} property. | |||
| 865 | All widgets can be created from a type specification. The general | 865 | All widgets can be created from a type specification. The general |
| 866 | syntax of a type specification is: | 866 | syntax of a type specification is: |
| 867 | 867 | ||
| 868 | @c FIXME: Add BNF reference here? If yes, what reference? | 868 | @c FIXME: Add BNF reference here? If yes, what reference? |
| 869 | @example | 869 | @example |
| 870 | @var{name} ::= (@var{name} [@var{keyword} @var{argument}]... @var{args}) | 870 | @var{name} ::= (@var{name} [@var{keyword} @var{argument}]... @var{args}) |
| 871 | | @var{name} | 871 | | @var{name} |
diff --git a/doc/misc/wisent.texi b/doc/misc/wisent.texi index 9738d790259..d42fe09240a 100644 --- a/doc/misc/wisent.texi +++ b/doc/misc/wisent.texi | |||
| @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ described in the @ref{Top, Semantic Manual, Semantic Manual, semantic}. | |||
| 109 | @chapter Wisent Overview | 109 | @chapter Wisent Overview |
| 110 | 110 | ||
| 111 | @dfn{Wisent} (the European Bison) is an implementation in Emacs Lisp | 111 | @dfn{Wisent} (the European Bison) is an implementation in Emacs Lisp |
| 112 | of the GNU Compiler Compiler Bison. Its code is a port of the C code | 112 | of the GNU Compiler Compiler Bison. Its code is a port of the C code |
| 113 | of GNU Bison 1.28 & 1.31. | 113 | of GNU Bison 1.28 & 1.31. |
| 114 | 114 | ||
| 115 | For more details on the basic concepts for understanding Wisent, it is | 115 | For more details on the basic concepts for understanding Wisent, it is |
| @@ -1795,7 +1795,7 @@ environment. | |||
| 1795 | @samp{grammar} rule. The semantic action uses the @code{TAG} macro to | 1795 | @samp{grammar} rule. The semantic action uses the @code{TAG} macro to |
| 1796 | produce a raw tag, automagically expanded by @semantic{}. | 1796 | produce a raw tag, automagically expanded by @semantic{}. |
| 1797 | 1797 | ||
| 1798 | But @samp{rules} part is parsed in Bison style! Why? | 1798 | But @samp{rules} part is parsed in Bison style! Why? |
| 1799 | 1799 | ||
| 1800 | Rule delimiters are the colon (@code{:}), that follows the nonterminal | 1800 | Rule delimiters are the colon (@code{:}), that follows the nonterminal |
| 1801 | name, and a final semicolon (@code{;}). Unfortunately these | 1801 | name, and a final semicolon (@code{;}). Unfortunately these |
diff --git a/lisp/doc-view.el b/lisp/doc-view.el index 801783bd766..f4d746c5589 100644 --- a/lisp/doc-view.el +++ b/lisp/doc-view.el | |||
| @@ -2151,6 +2151,8 @@ GOTO-PAGE-FN other than `doc-view-goto-page'." | |||
| 2151 | (pcase-let ((`(,conv-function ,type ,extension) | 2151 | (pcase-let ((`(,conv-function ,type ,extension) |
| 2152 | (pcase doc-view-doc-type | 2152 | (pcase doc-view-doc-type |
| 2153 | ('djvu (list #'doc-view-djvu->tiff-converter-ddjvu 'tiff "tif")) | 2153 | ('djvu (list #'doc-view-djvu->tiff-converter-ddjvu 'tiff "tif")) |
| 2154 | ((or 'ps 'postscript 'eps) | ||
| 2155 | (list #'doc-view-ps->png-converter-ghostscript 'png "png")) | ||
| 2154 | (_ (if (and (eq doc-view-pdf->png-converter-function | 2156 | (_ (if (and (eq doc-view-pdf->png-converter-function |
| 2155 | #'doc-view-pdf->png-converter-mupdf) | 2157 | #'doc-view-pdf->png-converter-mupdf) |
| 2156 | doc-view-mupdf-use-svg) | 2158 | doc-view-mupdf-use-svg) |
diff --git a/src/treesit.c b/src/treesit.c index c95a9fb9b01..baa1b8dfd11 100644 --- a/src/treesit.c +++ b/src/treesit.c | |||
| @@ -404,7 +404,7 @@ init_treesit_functions (void) | |||
| 404 | buffer's parser list. The discussion can be found in bug#59693. */ | 404 | buffer's parser list. The discussion can be found in bug#59693. */ |
| 405 | 405 | ||
| 406 | 406 | ||
| 407 | /*** Initialization */ | 407 | /*** Initialization */ |
| 408 | 408 | ||
| 409 | static Lisp_Object Vtreesit_str_libtree_sitter; | 409 | static Lisp_Object Vtreesit_str_libtree_sitter; |
| 410 | static Lisp_Object Vtreesit_str_tree_sitter; | 410 | static Lisp_Object Vtreesit_str_tree_sitter; |
| @@ -431,7 +431,7 @@ static Lisp_Object Vtreesit_str_pred; | |||
| 431 | functions. Remember to update docstrings when changing this value. | 431 | functions. Remember to update docstrings when changing this value. |
| 432 | 432 | ||
| 433 | If we think of programs and AST, it is very rare for any program to | 433 | If we think of programs and AST, it is very rare for any program to |
| 434 | have a very deep AST. For example, you would need 1000+ levels of | 434 | have a very deep AST. For example, you would need 1000+ levels of |
| 435 | nested if-statements, or a struct somehow nested for 1000+ levels. | 435 | nested if-statements, or a struct somehow nested for 1000+ levels. |
| 436 | It's hard for me to imagine any hand-written or machine generated | 436 | It's hard for me to imagine any hand-written or machine generated |
| 437 | program to be like that. So I think 1000 is already generous. If | 437 | program to be like that. So I think 1000 is already generous. If |
| @@ -485,10 +485,9 @@ treesit_initialize (void) | |||
| 485 | } | 485 | } |
| 486 | 486 | ||
| 487 | 487 | ||
| 488 | /*** Loading language library */ | 488 | /*** Loading language library */ |
| 489 | 489 | ||
| 490 | /* Translates a symbol treesit-<lang> to a C name | 490 | /* Translate a symbol treesit-<lang> to a C name treesit_<lang>. */ |
| 491 | treesit_<lang>. */ | ||
| 492 | static void | 491 | static void |
| 493 | treesit_symbol_to_c_name (char *symbol_name) | 492 | treesit_symbol_to_c_name (char *symbol_name) |
| 494 | { | 493 | { |
| @@ -758,7 +757,7 @@ Return nil if a grammar library for LANGUAGE is not available. */) | |||
| 758 | } | 757 | } |
| 759 | 758 | ||
| 760 | 759 | ||
| 761 | /*** Parsing functions */ | 760 | /*** Parsing functions */ |
| 762 | 761 | ||
| 763 | static void | 762 | static void |
| 764 | treesit_check_parser (Lisp_Object obj) | 763 | treesit_check_parser (Lisp_Object obj) |
| @@ -873,7 +872,7 @@ treesit_record_change (ptrdiff_t start_byte, ptrdiff_t old_end_byte, | |||
| 873 | } | 872 | } |
| 874 | } | 873 | } |
| 875 | 874 | ||
| 876 | /* Comment (ref:visible-beg-null) The purpose of visible_beg/end is to | 875 | /* Comment (ref:visible-beg-null) The purpose of visible_beg/end is to |
| 877 | keep track of "which part of the buffer does the tree-sitter tree | 876 | keep track of "which part of the buffer does the tree-sitter tree |
| 878 | see", in order to update the tree correctly. Visible_beg/end have | 877 | see", in order to update the tree correctly. Visible_beg/end have |
| 879 | two purposes: they "clip" buffer changes within them, and they | 878 | two purposes: they "clip" buffer changes within them, and they |
| @@ -1150,7 +1149,7 @@ treesit_read_buffer (void *parser, uint32_t byte_index, | |||
| 1150 | } | 1149 | } |
| 1151 | 1150 | ||
| 1152 | 1151 | ||
| 1153 | /*** Functions for parser and node object */ | 1152 | /*** Functions for parser and node object */ |
| 1154 | 1153 | ||
| 1155 | /* Wrap the parser in a Lisp_Object to be used in the Lisp | 1154 | /* Wrap the parser in a Lisp_Object to be used in the Lisp |
| 1156 | machine. */ | 1155 | machine. */ |
| @@ -1575,7 +1574,7 @@ treesit_parser_live_p (Lisp_Object parser) | |||
| 1575 | } | 1574 | } |
| 1576 | 1575 | ||
| 1577 | 1576 | ||
| 1578 | /*** Parser API */ | 1577 | /*** Parser API */ |
| 1579 | 1578 | ||
| 1580 | DEFUN ("treesit-parser-root-node", | 1579 | DEFUN ("treesit-parser-root-node", |
| 1581 | Ftreesit_parser_root_node, Streesit_parser_root_node, | 1580 | Ftreesit_parser_root_node, Streesit_parser_root_node, |
| @@ -1748,7 +1747,7 @@ See also `treesit-parser-set-included-ranges'. */) | |||
| 1748 | 1747 | ||
| 1749 | /* When the parser doesn't have a range set and we call | 1748 | /* When the parser doesn't have a range set and we call |
| 1750 | ts_parser_included_ranges on it, it doesn't return an empty list, | 1749 | ts_parser_included_ranges on it, it doesn't return an empty list, |
| 1751 | but rather return DEFAULT_RANGE. (A single range where start_byte | 1750 | but rather return DEFAULT_RANGE. (A single range where start_byte |
| 1752 | = 0, end_byte = UINT32_MAX). So we need to track whether the | 1751 | = 0, end_byte = UINT32_MAX). So we need to track whether the |
| 1753 | parser is ranged ourselves. */ | 1752 | parser is ranged ourselves. */ |
| 1754 | if (NILP (XTS_PARSER (parser)->last_set_ranges)) | 1753 | if (NILP (XTS_PARSER (parser)->last_set_ranges)) |
| @@ -1851,8 +1850,8 @@ treesit_check_node (Lisp_Object obj) | |||
| 1851 | xsignal1 (Qtreesit_node_buffer_killed, obj); | 1850 | xsignal1 (Qtreesit_node_buffer_killed, obj); |
| 1852 | } | 1851 | } |
| 1853 | 1852 | ||
| 1854 | /* Checks that OBJ is a positive integer and it is within the visible | 1853 | /* Check that OBJ is a positive integer and it is within the visible |
| 1855 | portion of BUF. */ | 1854 | portion of BUF. */ |
| 1856 | static void | 1855 | static void |
| 1857 | treesit_check_position (Lisp_Object obj, struct buffer *buf) | 1856 | treesit_check_position (Lisp_Object obj, struct buffer *buf) |
| 1858 | { | 1857 | { |
| @@ -2147,7 +2146,7 @@ nil. If NODE is nil, return nil. */) | |||
| 2147 | DEFUN ("treesit-node-child-by-field-name", | 2146 | DEFUN ("treesit-node-child-by-field-name", |
| 2148 | Ftreesit_node_child_by_field_name, | 2147 | Ftreesit_node_child_by_field_name, |
| 2149 | Streesit_node_child_by_field_name, 2, 2, 0, | 2148 | Streesit_node_child_by_field_name, 2, 2, 0, |
| 2150 | doc: /* Return the child of NODE with FIELD-NAME. | 2149 | doc: /* Return the child of NODE with FIELD-NAME (a string). |
| 2151 | Return nil if there is no such child. If NODE is nil, return nil. */) | 2150 | Return nil if there is no such child. If NODE is nil, return nil. */) |
| 2152 | (Lisp_Object node, Lisp_Object field_name) | 2151 | (Lisp_Object node, Lisp_Object field_name) |
| 2153 | { | 2152 | { |
| @@ -2368,7 +2367,7 @@ produced by tree-sitter. */) | |||
| 2368 | } | 2367 | } |
| 2369 | 2368 | ||
| 2370 | 2369 | ||
| 2371 | /*** Query functions */ | 2370 | /*** Query functions */ |
| 2372 | 2371 | ||
| 2373 | /* Convert a Lisp string to its printed representation in the tree-sitter | 2372 | /* Convert a Lisp string to its printed representation in the tree-sitter |
| 2374 | query syntax. */ | 2373 | query syntax. */ |
| @@ -3005,7 +3004,7 @@ the query. */) | |||
| 3005 | test for predicates. If predicates pass, then all good, if | 3004 | test for predicates. If predicates pass, then all good, if |
| 3006 | predicates don't pass, revert the result back to the result | 3005 | predicates don't pass, revert the result back to the result |
| 3007 | before this loop (PREV_RESULT). (Predicates control the entire | 3006 | before this loop (PREV_RESULT). (Predicates control the entire |
| 3008 | match.) This way we don't need to create a list of captures in | 3007 | match.) This way we don't need to create a list of captures in |
| 3009 | every for loop and nconc it to RESULT every time. That is indeed | 3008 | every for loop and nconc it to RESULT every time. That is indeed |
| 3010 | the initial implementation in which Yoav found nconc being the | 3009 | the initial implementation in which Yoav found nconc being the |
| 3011 | bottleneck (98.4% of the running time spent on nconc). */ | 3010 | bottleneck (98.4% of the running time spent on nconc). */ |
| @@ -3083,7 +3082,7 @@ the query. */) | |||
| 3083 | } | 3082 | } |
| 3084 | 3083 | ||
| 3085 | 3084 | ||
| 3086 | /*** Navigation */ | 3085 | /*** Navigation */ |
| 3087 | 3086 | ||
| 3088 | static inline void | 3087 | static inline void |
| 3089 | treesit_assume_true (bool val) | 3088 | treesit_assume_true (bool val) |
| @@ -3200,7 +3199,7 @@ treesit_traverse_sibling_helper (TSTreeCursor *cursor, | |||
| 3200 | if (ts_node_eq (first_child, start)) | 3199 | if (ts_node_eq (first_child, start)) |
| 3201 | return false; | 3200 | return false; |
| 3202 | 3201 | ||
| 3203 | /* PROBE is always DELTA siblings ahead of CURSOR. */ | 3202 | /* PROBE is always DELTA siblings ahead of CURSOR. */ |
| 3204 | TSTreeCursor probe = ts_tree_cursor_copy (cursor); | 3203 | TSTreeCursor probe = ts_tree_cursor_copy (cursor); |
| 3205 | /* This is position of PROBE minus position of CURSOR. */ | 3204 | /* This is position of PROBE minus position of CURSOR. */ |
| 3206 | ptrdiff_t delta = 0; | 3205 | ptrdiff_t delta = 0; |
| @@ -3484,7 +3483,7 @@ treesit_traverse_match_predicate (TSTreeCursor *cursor, Lisp_Object pred, | |||
| 3484 | return true; | 3483 | return true; |
| 3485 | } | 3484 | } |
| 3486 | } | 3485 | } |
| 3487 | /* Returning false is better than UB. */ | 3486 | /* Returning false is better than UB. */ |
| 3488 | return false; | 3487 | return false; |
| 3489 | } | 3488 | } |
| 3490 | 3489 | ||
| @@ -3997,7 +3996,7 @@ DEFUN ("treesit-available-p", Ftreesit_available_p, | |||
| 3997 | } | 3996 | } |
| 3998 | 3997 | ||
| 3999 | 3998 | ||
| 4000 | /*** Initialization */ | 3999 | /*** Initialization */ |
| 4001 | 4000 | ||
| 4002 | /* Initialize the tree-sitter routines. */ | 4001 | /* Initialize the tree-sitter routines. */ |
| 4003 | void | 4002 | void |